2007 Impreza-WRX-Owners Manual - Ecoblender

Copy and paste this link to your website, so they can see this document directly without any plugins.



Keywords

vehicle, with, your, will, light, that, when, system, plate, 北米Model, "A1920BE-B", 2006/, EDITED:, Black, from, engine, control, switch, When, indicator, airbag, front, warning, rear, button, this, seatbelt, tire, brake, position

Transcript

Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest
SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*C copyright 2006 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
1) Sedan
2) Wagon and OUTBACK
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Warranties
& Warranties for U.S.A.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the
United States come with the following
warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control Systems Warranty
. Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Please read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by
an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Anti-Corrosion Warranty
. Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please
read these warranties carefully.
! WRX-STI
CAUTION
WRX-STI models are equipped with
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights that contain mercury. For that
reason, it is necessary to remove
HID headlights before vehicle disposal. Once removed, please reuse,
recycle or dispose of the HID headlights as hazardous waste.
! All models except WRX-STI
CAUTION
This vehicle does not contain mercury devices or parts.
How to use this Owner’s
Manual
& Using your Owner’s Manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the operation of instrument panel indicators and
how to use the instruments and other
switches.
1
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate
your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and explains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem while driving, such as a
flat tire or engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about dimension
and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Uniform
tire quality grading standards and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
& Safety warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in injury to
you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
& Safety symbol
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “Do
not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Vehicle symbols
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Mark Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Power door lock and unlock
Passengers’ windows lock
and unlock
Fuel
Front fog lights
Parking lights
Hazard warning flasher
Engine hood
Mark Name
Trunk lid (Sedan)
Seat heater
Child restraint top tether anchorages
Child restraint lower anchorages
Horn
Windshield wiper deicer
Wiper intermittent
Windshield wiper and washer
Rear window wiper
Rear window washer
Lights
Mark Name
Parking lights, tail lights, license plate light and instrument panel illumination
Headlights
Headlight beam leveler
Illumination brightness
Fan speed
Instrument panel outlets
Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
Foot outlets
Windshield defroster and foot
outlets
Windshield defroster
Rear window defogger/Outside mirror defogger
3
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
4
Mark Name
Air recirculation
Outside air
Engine oil
Washer
Door lock (Transmitter)
Door unlock (Transmitter)
Safety precautions when
driving
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) airbag does not do away
with the need to fasten seatbelts.
In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious
accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
Carefully read the sections “Seatbelts”
and “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)” section in chapter 1 of
this Owner’s Manual for instructions and
precautions concerning the seatbelt system and SRS airbag system.
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Child safety
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
. While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should
always be placed in the REAR
seat in an infant or child restraint
system which is appropriate for
the child’s age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a
child restraint system, the child
should sit in the REAR seat and
be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child
to stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Put children aged 12 and under in
the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt.
The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12
years of age and under and are
not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Always use the child safety locks
whenever a child rides in the rear
seat. Serious injury could result
if a child accidentally opened the
door and fell out. Refer to the
“Child safety locks” section in
chapter 2.
. Always lock the passenger’s windows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Refer to the “Windows” section in
chapter 2.
. Never leave unattended children
in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, temperature
in a closed vehicle could quickly
become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries
to them.
. Help prevent young children from
locking themselves in the trunk.
When leaving the vehicle, either
close all windows and lock all
doors or cancel the inside trunk
lid release. Also make certain
that the trunk is closed. On hot
or sunny days, the temperature
in a trunk could quickly become
high enough to cause death or
serious heat-related injuries including brain damage to anyone
locked inside, particularly for
small children.
Carefully read the sections “Child restraint
systems”, “*SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System airbag)”, and “Seatbelts”
section in chapter 1 of this Owner’s
Manual for instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint system,
seatbelt system and SRS airbag system.
5
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (8,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
6
& Engine exhaust gas (Carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system always works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate
closed while driving to prevent
exhaust gas from entering the
vehicle.
& Drinking and driving
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reaction and
impairs your perception, judgment
and attentiveness. If you drive after
drinking – even if you drink just a
little – it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most
frequent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently, you may
have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your
blood is below the legal limit. The safest
thing you can do is never drink and drive.
However if you have no choice but to
drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before getting behind the wheel.
& Drugs and driving
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
of being involved in a serious or
fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
you have a medical condition that requires
you to take drugs, please consult with
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
& Driving when tired or sleepy
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction will be delayed and your
perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive
when tired or sleepy, your, your
passengers’ and other persons’
chances of being involved in a
serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but
instead find a safe place to rest if you
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
should make periodic rest stops to refresh
yourself before continuing on your journey.
When possible, you should share the
driving with others.
& Modification of your vehicle
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine Subaru
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its
performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be covered under warranties.
& Car phone/cell phone and
driving
CAUTION
Do not use a car phone/cell phone
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead
to an accident. If you use a car
phone/cell phone, pull off the road
and park in a safe place before
using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
may legally be used while driving.
& Driving with pets
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can
be hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling
harness which can be secured to the rear
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
in the front passenger’s seat. For further
information, consult your veterinarian,
local animal protection society or pet
shop.
& Tire pressures
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the spare)
at least once a month and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard.
Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in
7
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (10,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8
chapter 11 for detailed information.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
& California proposition 65
warning
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids in vehicles and
certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Black plate (1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1
Keys and doors 2
Instruments and controls
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
Driving tips 8
In case of emergency 9
Appearance care 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13
Index 14
3
北米Model "A1920BE-B" Edited: 2006/ 9/ 19
Black plate (12,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
10
Illustrated index
& Exterior
1) Engine hood (page 11-4)
2) Headlight switch (page 3-22)
3) Replacing bulbs (page 11-45)
4) Wiper switch (page 3-27)
5) Moonroof (page 2-24)
6) Door locks (page 2-4)
7) Tire pressure (page 11-31)
8) Flat tires (page 9-4)
9) Tire chains (page 8-11)
10) Front fog light button (page 3-26)
11) Tie-down hooks (page 9-11)
12) Towing hook (page 9-11)
Black plate (13,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1) Rear window defogger button
(page 3-29)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-18)
4) Tie-down/Towing hook (page 9-12)
5) Trunk (page 2-20)
6) Rear gate (page 2-23)
7) Roof rail (page 8-14)
11
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (14,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
12
& Interior
! Passenger compartment area
1) Lower anchorages for child restraint
system (page 1-29)
2) Seatbelt (page 1-9)
3) Moonroof (page 2-24)
4) Parking brake lever (page 7-24)
5) Front seat (page 1-2)
6) Rear seat (page 1-6)
Black plate (15,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1) Cup holder (page 6-5)
2) Center console (page 6-4)
3) Glove box (page 6-4)
4) Pocket
5) Front power supply socket (page 6-6)
AUX unit (if equipped) (page 5-20)
13
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (16,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
14
& Instrument panel 1) Door locks (page 2-4)
2) Outside mirror switch (page 3-33)
3) Light control lever (page 3-22)
4) Combination meter (page 3-6)
5) Wiper control lever (page 3-26)
6) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-6)
7) Audio (page 5-1)
8) Gear shift lever (5MT) (page 7-11)/
Gear shift lever (6MT) (page 7-9)/
Selector lever (AT) (page 7-15)
9) Climate control (page 4-1)
10) Cruise control (page 7-26)
11) Horn (page 3-35)
12) SRS airbag (page 1-35)
13) Tilt steering (page 3-35)
14) Fuse box (page 11-42)
15) Hood lock release knob (page 11-4)
16) Power windows (page 2-18)
Black plate (17,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Parking light switch (page 3-25)
2) Windshield wiper (page 3-27)
3) Mist (page 3-28)
4) Windshield washer (page 3-28)
5) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-28)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-26)
7) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-25)
8) Light control lever (page 3-22)
9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-22)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-23)
11) Turn signal (for lane change) (page 3-24)
12) Turn signal (page 3-24)
15
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (18,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
16
& Combination meter
! U.S.-spec. vehicles
! WRX
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)
2) Selector lever position indicator
(page 3-20)
3) Temperature gauge (page 3-13)
4) Tachometer (page 3-12)
5) Speedometer (page 3-11)
6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-11)
7) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-11)
8) Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-13)
9) Low fuel warning light (page 3-12)
Black plate (19,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
! WRX-STI 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)
2) DCCD indicator (page 3-20)
3) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)
4) Tachometer (page 3-7)
5) REV indicator (page 3-9)
6) Speedometer (page 3-7)
7) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-7)
8) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6)
9) REV setting knob (page 3-6)
10) Outside temperature indicator (page 3-9)
11) Low fuel warning light (page 3-8)
17
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (20,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
18
! Except turbo models 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)
2) Selector lever position indicator
(page 3-20)
3) Temperature gauge (page 3-13)
4) Speedometer (page 3-11)
5) Tachometer (page 3-12)
6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-11)
7) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-11)
8) Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-13)
9) Low fuel warning light (page 3-12)
Black plate (21,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
! Canada-spec. vehicles
! WRX
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)
2) Selector lever position indicator
(page 3-20)
3) Temperature gauge (page 3-13)
4) Tachometer (page 3-12)
5) Speedometer (page 3-11)
6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-11)
7) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-11)
8) Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-13)
9) Low fuel warning light (page 3-12)
19
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (22,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
20
! WRX-STI 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)
2) DCCD indicator (page 3-20)
3) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)
4) Tachometer (page 3-7)
5) REV indicator (page 3-9)
6) Speedometer (page 3-7)
7) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-7)
8) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6)
9) REV setting knob (page 3-6)
10) Outside temperature indicator (page 3-9)
11) Low fuel warning light (page 3-8)
Black plate (23,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
! Except turbo models 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)
2) Selector lever position indicator
(page 3-20)
3) Temperature gauge (page 3-13)
4) Speedometer (page 3-11)
5) Tachometer (page 3-12)
6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-11)
7) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-11)
8) Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-13)
9) Low fuel warning light (page 3-12)
21
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (24,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
22
& WARNING AND INDICATOR
LIGHT
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-14
SRS airbag system
warning light 3-14
or Passenger airbag ONindicator light 3-15
or Passenger airbag OFFindicator light 3-15
CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunction
indicator lamp
3-16
Charge warning light 3-16
Oil pressure warning
light 3-16
AT OIL temperature
warning light (if
equipped)
3-17
Mark Name Page
or ABS warning light 3-17
or Brake system warning
light 3-18
Door open warning light 3-19
All-Wheel Drive warning
light (if equipped) 3-19
Turn signal indicator
lights 3-20
High beam indicator light 3-20
Security indicator light 2-4,2-13
Intercooler water spray
warning light (if
equipped)
3-19
Lights indicator light (if
equipped) 3-21
Cruise control indicator
light
3-20
Mark Name Page
Cruise control set indicator light 3-20
REV indicator light (if
equipped) 3-21
Rear differential oil temperature warning light (if
equipped)
3-17
Driver’s control center
differential auto indicator
light (if equipped)
3-20
Driver’s control center
differential indicator light
(if equipped)
3-21
Driver’s control center
differential indicator and
warning lights (if
equipped)
3-21
Black plate (25,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Tire changing tools 1) Jack (page 9-16)
2) Jack handle (page 9-16)
3) Spare tire (page 9-16)
23
0
Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Front seats........................................................... 1-2
Fore and aft adjustment....................................... 1-3
Reclining the seatback ........................................ 1-3
Seat cushion height adjustment
(Driver’s seat) ................................................... 1-4
Head restraint adjustment (if equipped)................ 1-4
Active head restraint (if equipped) ....................... 1-4
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-5
Rear seats............................................................ 1-6
Armrest (if equipped)........................................... 1-7
Head restraint adjustment – Wagon ..................... 1-7
Folding down the rear seatback – Wagon............. 1-8
Seatbelts .............................................................. 1-9
Seatbelt safety tips.............................................. 1-9
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-11
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-11
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-11
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-12
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-18
Seatbelt extender ............................................... 1-18
Front seatbelt pretensioners............................. 1-19
System monitors ............................................... 1-20
System servicing ............................................... 1-21
Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-22
Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-22
Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-23
Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-25
Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
seatbelt ........................................................... 1-25
Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-28
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-29
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-32
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)................................................ 1-35
Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
airbags and lap/shoulder restraints .................. 1-35
Subaru advanced frontal airbag system.............. 1-39
SRS side airbag................................................. 1-50
SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-55
SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-56
Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-57
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Black plate (28,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid the possibility of
loss of vehicle control and of
personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure the hands and feet of rear
seat passengers are clear of the
adjusting mechanism.
. Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
Put children aged 12 and under in
the rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill children,
especially if they are 12 years of age
and under and are not restrained or
improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured
from deployment is greater. For that
reason, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (including those
in child seats and those that have
outgrown child restraint devices) sit
in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seat) in the REAR seats at all
times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning child restraint sysBlack plate (29,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
tems, see the “Child restraint systems” section in this chapter.
& Fore and aft adjustment
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to
the desired position. Then release the
lever and move the seat back and forth to
make sure that it is securely locked into
place.
& Reclining the seatback
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
seatback to the desired position. Then
release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
released. When operating the reclining
lever to return the seatback, hold it lightly
so that it may be raised back gradually.
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (30,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Seat cushion height adjustment (Driver’s seat)
1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
is lowered.
2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
rises.
The height of the seat can be adjusted by
moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
up and down.
& Head restraint adjustment (if
equipped)
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
To lower it, push the head restraint down
while pressing the release button on the
top of the seatback.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the risk
of serious neck injury in the event
that the vehicle is struck from the
rear.
& Active head restraint (if
equipped)
The front seats of your vehicle are
equipped with active head restraints. They
automatically tilt forward slightly in the
event the vehicle is struck from the rear,
decreasing the amount of rearward head
movement and thus reducing the risk of
whiplash. For maximum effectiveness, the
head restraint should be adjusted so that
the center of the head restraint is closest
to the top of the occupant’s ears.
CAUTION
. Each active head restraint is
effective only when its height is
properly adjusted and driver/passenger sits in the correct posiBlack plate (31,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
tion on the seat.
. If your vehicle is involved in a
rear-end collision, have an
authorized SUBARU dealer inspect the active head restraints.
. The active head restraints may
not operate in the event the
vehicle experiences only a slight
impact in the rear.
. The active head restraints may be
damaged if they are pushed hard
from behind or subjected to
shock. As a result, they may not
function if the vehicle suffers a
rear impact.
Seat heater (if equipped)
Driver’s side
1) HI – Rapid heating
2) LO – Normal heating
Front passenger’s side
1) HI – Rapid heating
2) LO – Normal heating
The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO”
or “HI” position on the switch, as desired,
depending on the temperature. Selecting
the “HI” position will cause the seat to heat
up quicker.
The indicator located on the switch comes
on when the seat heater is in operation.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (32,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CAUTION
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low temperatures if he/she uses the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons concerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
can cause battery discharge.
Rear seats
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
Black plate (33,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Armrest (if equipped)
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge
of the armrest.
WARNING
To avoid the possibility of serious
injury, passengers must never be
allowed to sit on the center armrest
while the vehicle is in motion.
! Loading long objects
Folding down the armrest and opening the
seatback panel affords a loading space for
long objects.
To open the seatback panel, pull the
release tab.
WARNING
. Secure long objects properly to
prevent them from shooting forward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop or sharp
cornering. Tie long objects down
with a rope or something equivalent.
. Avoid loading objects longer
than 6.6 ft (2 m) and heavier than
55 lbs (25 kg). Such objects can
interfere with the driver’s proper
operation of the vehicle, possibly
causing an accident and serious
injury.
& Head restraint adjustment –
Wagon
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the risk
of serious neck injury in the event
that the vehicle is struck from the
rear.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (34,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Rear windows side seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to an appropriate
position depending on your sitting
height.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
To lower it, push the head restraint down
while pressing the release button on the
top of the seatback.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
When the seats are not occupied, lower
the head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
! Rear center seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to an appropriate
position depending on your sitting
height.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To lower it, push the head restraint down
while pressing the release button.
When the rear-center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to an
appropriate position depending on your
sitting height. When the rear center seating position is not occupied, lower the
head restraint to improve rearward visibility.
& Folding down the rear seatback – Wagon
WARNING
. After returning the rear seatback
to its original position, be certain
to place all of the seatbelts and
the tab attached to the seat
cushion above the seat cushion.
And make certain that the
shoulder belts are fully visible.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area. Doing so may
result in serious injury or death.
. Secure lengthy items properly to
prevent them from shooting forward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
Black plate (35,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1. Lower the head restraints.
2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the
release knob and then fold the seatback
down.
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that it is securely
locked.
Seatbelts
& Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to
support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more
persons – even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious
injury or death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attaching hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
. Put children aged 12 and under in
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (36,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
the rear seat properly restrained
at all times. The SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed
and force and can injure or even
kill children, especially if they are
12 years of age and under and
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. For that
reason, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those
that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s height
and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions
and precautions concerning the
child restraint system, see the
“Child restraint systems” section
in this chapter.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the
driver and front passenger when any of
the SRS frontal and side airbags deploy.
! Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is
suitable for your vehicle. See information
on “Child restraint systems” in this chapter.
! Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt
anchor height (window-side seating positions only) and then if necessary move the
child closer to the belt buckle to help
provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must
be taken to securely place the lap belt as
low as possible on the hips and not on the
child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the
belt cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
! Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
Black plate (37,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
& Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking
Retractor normally functions as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
ELR has an additional locking mode
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode” intended to secure a child restraint
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
out completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,
the seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the seatbelt
retracts fully and the retractor returned to
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
mode.
For instructions on how to convert the
retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
the ELR mode, see the “Child restraint
systems” section in this chapter.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s seat, as
required by current safety standards.
There is a seatbelt warning light in the
combination meter.
If the driver has not yet fastened the
seatbelt when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning
light will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that
the seatbelt is unfastened. If the driver’s
seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also
sound simultaneously.
If the driver’s seatbelt is still not fastened 6
seconds later, the warning light will remain
lit for 15 seconds. If the driver’s seatbelt is
still not fastened even 15 seconds later
(21 seconds after turning ON the ignition
switch), the warning lights will alternate
between flashing and steady illumination
at 15-second intervals, and the chime will
sound while the warning light is flashing.
Alternate flashing and steady illumination
of the warning lights and sounding of the
chime will continue until the driver fastens
the seatbelt.
NOTE
. If the driver unfastens the seatbelt
after fastening, the seatbelt warning
device operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
. At speeds lower than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light will alternate
between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals. The
chime will not sound.
. At speeds higher than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light will alternate
between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals and
the chime will sound while the
warning light is flashing.
. It is possible to cancel the warning
operation that follows the 6-second
warning after turning ON the ignition
switch. When the ignition switch is
turned ON next time, however, the
complete sequence of the warning
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (38,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
operation resumes. For further details
about canceling the warning operation,
please contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Fastening the seatbelt
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of across the weaker
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or
death.
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they
cool.
! Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
Black plate (39,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
belt anchor height
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger.
To lower the anchor height, push the
release button and slide the anchor down.
To raise the anchor height, slide the
anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to
make sure that it is locked in place.
Always adjust the anchor height so that
the shoulder belt passes over the middle
of the shoulder without touching the neck.
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (40,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
seatbelt on Wagon)
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Adjusting the rear seat shoulder belt
anchor height (window-side seating
positions only)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the best position for the
passenger. To adjust the anchor height,
push the release button and slide the
anchor up or down. Pull down on the
anchor to make sure that it is locked in
place.
Always adjust the anchor height so that
the shoulder belt passes over the middle
of the shoulder without touching the neck.
Black plate (41,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear center seatbelt on Wagon
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
2) Connector (tongue)
3) Connector (buckle)
4) Center seatbelt buckle
WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, especially when inserting the connector’s tongue plate into the mating
buckle (on right-hand side), always
check that the webbing is not
twisted.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (42,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
to the respective buckles. If the
seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
belt (with the connector’s tongue
plate not fastened to the connector’s buckle on the right-hand side),
it cannot properly restrain the wearer in position in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or
death.
1. Remove the tongue plate from the belt
holder located under the right rear quarter
glass and pull out the seatbelt slowly.
2. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it
through the belt guide as follows: First
insert one edge of the belt into the open
gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest of
the belt in, so that the whole belt fits
inside.
3. After confirming that the webbing is not
twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
is heard.
If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
into the center seatbelt buckle marked
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
clicks.
Black plate (43,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the release button of the center
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed
object into the slot in the connector
(buckle) on the right-hand side and push
it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will
disconnect from the buckle.
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (44,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Insert the connector (tongue)
into the belt holder.
CAUTION
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly.
Otherwise, the metal tongue
plates may hit against the trim,
resulting in damaged trim.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
damage to the trim.
& Seatbelt maintenance
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating properly.
Seatbelt extender
If the front seatbelts are not long enough
to permit the tongue plate to engage with
the seatbelt buckle, an optional seatbelt
extender is available from your SUBARU
dealer. When ordering an extender, only
order one particularly designed for your
vehicle. Several different types of extenders are available to match various
varieties of front seatbelt designs. See
your SUBARU dealer for assistance.
The extender adds approximately 8
inches (200 mm) of length and it can be
used for either the driver or front passenger seating position.
For the safety of others, the extender
should be removed after each use, especially if the next person using the seatbelt
does not need one.
Note that leaving the seatbelt extender’s
tongue plate engaged with the seatbelt
buckle may prevent the Subaru advanced
frontal airbag system from functioning
correctly or cause the system to fail.
WARNING
Be sure to observe the following
when using the seatbelt extender.
Failure to follow these instructions
Black plate (45,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
and warnings could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and
result in more serious injury in the
event of a collision.
. Never use the extender when the
belt itself is long enough to
permit it to be buckled properly.
If removal of heavy clothing is all
that is needed to permit the
seatbelt to be buckled properly,
remove the heavy clothing and
do not use the extender.
. Do not use the extender if the
buckle of the extender rests over
the abdomen.
. Do not let someone else use the
extender. Use of an extender
when it is not needed could
reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and result in more serious injury in the event of a
collision.
. Use the extender only for the
front seatbelts and only for the
model for which it was originally
provided. Never use the extender
for the rear seatbelts or for a
different model.
NOTE
When the seatbelt extender is used by
a pregnant passenger, consult a doctor
to get approval in advance.
To connect the extender to the seatbelt,
insert the tongue plate into the seatbelt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on the
buckle-release buttons of the extender
and the seatbelt are both facing outward
as shown in the diagram. You will hear a
click when the tongue plate locks into the
buckle.
When releasing the seatbelt, press on the
buckle-release button on the extender, not
on the seatbelt. This helps to prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.
Front seatbelt pretensioners
The driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal
collision.
The pretensioner sensor also serves as
the frontal SRS airbag sensor. If the
sensor detects a certain predetermined
amount of force during a frontal collision,
the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in
by the retractor to take up the slack so that
the belt more effectively restrains the front
seat occupant.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (46,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor frontal
impacts, in side or rear impacts or in
roll-over accidents.
. The driver’s seat and passenger’s
seat pretensioners and frontal SRS
airbag operate simultaneously.
. Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seatbelt retractor assemblies must be
replaced only by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only
genuine SUBARU parts.
. If either front seatbelt does not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
. If the front seatbelt retractor assembly or surrounding area has been
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him
to the contents of this section.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seatbelts properly fastened. Refer to
the “Seatbelts” section in this
chapter.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt retractor assemblies or surrounding area.
This could result in accidental
activation of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in serious injury. Seatbelt
pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of front seatbelt retractors
equipped with seatbelt pretensioners, see your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
retractor assemblies or scrapping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
& System monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
while the vehicle is being driven. The
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
module with the SRS airbag system.
Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a
seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag
system warning light will illuminate. The
SRS airbag system warning light will show
normal system operation by lighting for
approximately 6 seconds when the igniBlack plate (47,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
The following components are monitored
by the indicator:
. Front sub sensor (Right-hand side)
. Front sub sensor (Left-hand side)
. Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
. Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)
. Frontal airbag module (Front passenger’s side)
. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar righthand side)
. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar lefthand side)
. Side airbag module (Driver’s side)
. Side airbag module (Front passenger’s
side)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passenger’s side)
. Seatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side)
. Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passenger’s side)
. Driver’s seat position sensor
. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension
sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in
the event of a collision, which may
increase the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warning light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
& System servicing
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt retractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or
SRS airbag or could make the
system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. The wiring harnesses of the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag
systems are covered with yellow
insulation and the connectors of
the system are yellow for easy
identification. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit
related to the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS airbag systems.
For required servicing of the
seatbelt pretensioner, see your
nearest SUBARU dealer.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (48,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CAUTION
The front sub sensors are located in
both front fenders and the SRS
airbag control module including the
impact sensors is located under the
center console. If you need service
or repair in those areas or near the
front seatbelt retractors, we recommend that you have an authorized
SUBARU dealer perform the work.
NOTE
If the front part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts to
your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owner’s Manual.
Child restraint systems
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle. You should use an infant or child
restraint system that meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compatible with your vehicle and is appropriate for the child’s age and size. All child
restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those covered under the section in
this manual, entitled “Installation of child
restraint systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)”).
Children could be endangered in an
Black plate (49,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
accident if their child restraints are not
properly secured in the vehicle. When
installing the child restraint system, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child
on his or her lap or in his or her
arms while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision,
because the child will be caught
between the passenger and objects
inside the vehicle.
Additionally, holding a child in your
lap or arms in the front seat exposes
that child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
WARNING
Children should be properly restrained at all times. Never allow a
child to stand up, or to kneel on any
seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or
kneeling on or in front of the front
seat are exposed another serious
danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
& Where to place a child restraint system
The following are SUBARU’s recommendations on where to place a child restraint
system in your vehicle.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (50,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passenger’s airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
installing a child restraint system.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Rear seat, center seating position
Installing a child restraint system is not
recommended, although the A/ELR seatbelt and an upper anchorage (tether
anchorage) are provided in this position.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
If it is unavoidable to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat’s center
seating position, lower the center head
restraint to the lowest position and install
the child restraint system by correctly
passing the rear center seatbelt through
the belt guide.
WARNING
Put children aged 12 and under in
the rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill children,
especially if they are 12 years of age
and under and are not restrained or
improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured
from deployment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure
ALL types of child restraint devices
(including forward facing child
seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
You should choose a restraint device which is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
WARNING
S I N CE YOUR VEH I C L E I S
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S
SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A
REARWARD FAC ING CH ILD
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
Black plate (51,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Choosing a child restraint
system
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protection. The child
restraint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for the United States
or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for Canada. It can be identified by
looking for the label on the child restraint
system or the manufacturer’s statement of
compliance in the document attached to
the system.
Also it is important for you to make sure
that the child restraint system is compatible with the vehicle in which it will be
used.
& Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be increased.
! Installing a rearward facing child
restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (52,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
6. Push and pull the child restraint
system forward and from side to side to
check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a
child restraint can be more firmly secured
by pushing it down into the seat cushion
and then tightening the seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
8. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
Black plate (53,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
! Installing forward facing child restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
6. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, move it back and forth
and right and left to check if it is firmly
secured. Sometimes a child restraint can
be more firmly secured by pushing it down
into the seat cushion and then tightening
the seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (54,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Sedan
Wagon
8. If the child restraint system requires a
top tether, latch the hook onto the top
tether anchorage and tighten the top
tether. See the “Top tether anchorages”
for additional instructions.
9. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
& Installing a booster seat
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be inBlack plate (55,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
creased.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster
seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat and the child
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to
twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
4. To remove the booster seat, press the
release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or reducing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will increase the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious internal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.
& Installation of child restraint
systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (56,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be increased.
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of your
vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
child restraint systems are secured to the
designated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body. The lower and tether anchorages are sometimes referred to as the
LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren).
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
anchorages (bars) and three upper anchorages (tether anchorages) for accommodating such child restraint systems.
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
installing a child restraint system only on
the rear seat window-side seating positions. For each window-side seating position, two lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located where
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
Black plate (57,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
The tether anchorages (upper anchorages) are provided for all the seating
positions (center and both window-side
ones) of the rear seat.
You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of
the rear seat seatbacks. These marks
indicate the positions of the lower anchorages (bars).
Each lower anchorage is located where
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
1. Use the “ ” marks to locate the two
lower anchorages (bars) for the position
where you want to install the child restraint
system.
2. While following the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer, connect the lower hooks onto the
lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connected, make sure the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (58,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
3. [If your child restraint system is of a
flexible attachment type (which uses
tether belts to connect the child restraint
system properly to the lower anchorages)]
While pushing the child restraint into the
seat cushion, pull both left and right lower
tether belts up to secure the child restraint
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
belt.
4. Connect the top tether hook to the
tether anchorage and firmly tighten the
tether.
For information on how to set the top
tether, read the following “Top tether
anchorages”.
5. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move seat back
and forth and right and left to verify that it
is held securely in position.
6. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installation.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
& Top tether anchorages
Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
instructions by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or available.
Black plate (59,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
! Anchorage location
! Sedan
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
Three upper anchorages are installed on
the rear shelf behind the rear seat.
! Wagon
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
There is an anchorage for the center
seating position at the rear edge of the
roof, and anchorages for each of the two
window-side seating positions on the rear
wall of the cargo area.
! To hook the top tether
! Sedan
1. Attach the child restraint top tether
hook to the appropriate upper anchorage.
2. Tighten the top tether securely.
Please contact your SUBARU dealer if
you have any question regarding the
installation of a child restraint system.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (60,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Wagon
1. Remove the headrest at the windowside seating position where the child
restraint system has been installed with
the lower anchorages or seatbelt; lift up
the headrest while pressing the release
button. Store the headrest in the cargo
area. Avoid placing the headrest in the
passenger compartment to prevent it from
being thrown around in the passenger
compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp
turn.
2. (For both window-side seating positions) Remove the cap from the anchor
fitting cover.
Center
Window-side
3. Attach the child restraint top tether
hook to the appropriate upper anchorage.
4. Tighten the top tether securely.
Please contact your SUBARU dealer if
you have any question regarding the
installation of a child restraint system.
CAUTION
Always remove the headrest when
mounting a child restraint system
with a top tether. Otherwise, the top
tether cannot be fastened tightly.
Black plate (61,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
*SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used because the airbag system supplements the
vehicle’s seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the
driver and front passenger when any of
the SRS frontal and side airbags deploy.
& Vehicle with driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS airbags and lap/shoulder restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in addition to a
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating
position.
The supplemental restraint system (SRS)
consists of two airbags (driver’s and front
passenger’s frontal airbags) or four airbags (driver’s and front passenger’s frontal airbags and driver’s and front passenger’s side airbags).
These SRS airbags are designed only
as a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, see the “Front seatbelt pretensioners” section in this chapter.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS airbag is designed only
as a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not do away with the
need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it
offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
see the “Seatbelts” section in
this chapter.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed – faster than
the blink of an eye – and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS
airbag contacts an occupant not
in proper position such as one
thrown forward during pre-accident braking.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms
because of the SRS airbag deployment force.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (62,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, those
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
cause injury.
WARNING
. Put children aged 12 and under in
the rear seat properly restrained
at all times. The SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed
and force and can injure or even
kill children, especially if they are
12 years of age and under and
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly
recommend that ALL children
(including those in child seats
and those that have outgrown
child restraint devices) sit in the
REAR seat properly restrained at
all times in a child restraint
device or in a seatbelt, whichever
is appropriate for the child’s age,
height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint
system, see the “Child restraint
systems” section in this chapter.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Never allow a child to stand up,
or to kneel on the front passenger’s seat, or never hold a child
on your lap or in your arms. The
SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
Black plate (63,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
him or her to the applicable section in
this Owner’s Manual.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (64,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Components 1) Airbag control module (including impact
sensors)
2) Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)
3) Frontal airbag module (Front passenger’s side)
4) Front sub sensor (Left-hand side)
5) Front sub sensor (Right-hand side)
6) Side airbag module (Driver’s side)
7) Side airbag module (Front passenger’s
side)
8) Side airbag sensor (Center pillar lefthand side)
9) Side airbag sensor (Center pillar righthand side)
10) Airbag wiring (Yellow)
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passenger’s
side)
13) Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passenger’s side)
14) Seatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side)
15) Driver’s seat position sensor
16) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sensor
17) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
18) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
19) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
20) SRS airbag system warning light
Black plate (65,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Subaru advanced frontal airbag system
Your vehicle is equipped with a Subaru
advanced frontal airbag system that complies with the new advanced frontal airbag
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 208.
The Subaru advanced frontal airbag system automatically determines the deployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The Subaru
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed
in the center portion of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is stowed near the top of the dashboard
under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags deploy and supplement the
seatbelts by reducing the impact on the
driver’s and front passenger’s head and
chest.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up, or to
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (66,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
WARNING
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position
when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well
back in the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical while
still maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that
can result when the SRS airbag
contacts an occupant not in proper
position such as one thrown toward
the front of the vehicle during preaccident braking.
WARNING
Do not put any objects over the
steering wheel pad and dashboard.
If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
those objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause
injury.
Black plate (67,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mirror over the rear view mirror. If the
SRS airbag deploys, those objects
could become projectiles that could
seriously injure vehicle occupants.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact, backward-forward adjustment
of the driver’s seat position and whether or
not he/she is wearing the seatbelt.
The backward-forward adjustment of the
driver’s seat position is monitored by the
driver’s seat position sensor under the
driver’s seat.
Whether or not the driver is wearing the
seatbelt is monitored by the seatbelt
buckle switch.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may cause the seatbelt buckle
switch and/or the seat position sensor to
malfunction, preventing the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system from functioning correctly or causing the system to
fail.
. Do not place articles/metal objects or
install any accessory other than a genuine
SUBARU accessory under the driver’s
seat. Do not allow the rear seat occupant
to kick the driver’s seat or push up its
bottom surface with his/her feet.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle or under the driver’s seat.
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the
driver’s seat position sensor have failed,
the SRS airbag system warning light will
illuminate. Although the driver’s SRS
frontal airbag can deploy regardless of
the backward-forward adjustment of the
driver’s seat position even when the
warning light is on, have the system
inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light comes on.
NOTE
The driver’s SRS side airbag and
seatbelt pretensioner are not controlled
by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag
system.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
The total load on the seat is monitored by
the occupant detection system’s weight
sensor located under the seat.
The system has another sensor that
monitors the tension of the front passenger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and
seatbelt tension data from the sensors,
the occupant detection system determines
whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag should or should not be inflated.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may prevent the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system from functioning correctly or cause the system to
fail.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (68,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
. Do not apply any strong impact to the
front passenger’s seat such as by kicking.
. Do not spill liquid on the front passenger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off
immediately.
. Do not remove or disassemble the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not install any accessory (such as
an audio amplifier) other than a genuine
SUBARU accessory under the front passenger’s seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrella, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.
. The front passenger’s seat must not be
used with the head restraint removed.
. Do not leave any article including a
child restraint system on the front passenger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue and
buckle engaged when you leave your
vehicle.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
. Do not use front seats with their backward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
the “Front seats” section in this chapter.
. If you use an optional seatbelt extender, remove it after each use. (Refer to the
“Seatbelt extender” section in this chapter.)
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. Have the
system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system
warning light comes on.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
Subaru advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle inspected at your
SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag
and seatbelt pretensioner are not controlled by the Subaru advanced frontal
airbag system.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
ON or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator
or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located next to the
clock in the center portion of the dashboard.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Following the system check, both indicators
extinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one
of the indicators illuminates depending on
Black plate (69,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
the status of the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag determined by the Subaru
advanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain extinguished.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain extinguished while the OFF indicator will
illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indicators remain lit or extinguished simultaneously even after the system check
period, the system is faulty. Contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.
! Conditions in which front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding the
front passenger’s seat:
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with a rearward
facing child restraint system and an infant
is restrained with it. (See WARNING that
follows.)
. The seat is equipped with a forward
facing child restraint system and a small
child is restrained with it. (See WARNING
that follows.)
. The seat is equipped with a booster
seat and a small child is in the booster
seat. (See WARNING that follows.)
. The seat is relieved of the occupant
load for a time exceeding the predetermined monitoring time period.
. The seat is occupied by a child who
has outgrown a child restraint system
(See WARNING that follows.) or by a
small adult.
. The front passenger’s occupant detection system is faulty.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
sure to install it in the REAR seat in
a correct manner. Also, it is strongly
recommended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be
installed in the REAR seat, and that
even children who have outgrown a
child restraint system be also
seated in the REAR seat. This is
because children sitting in the front
passenger’s seat may be killed or
severely injured should the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest
place for children.
When the front passenger’s seat is occupied by a child, observe the following
precautions. Failure to do so may increase
the load on the front passenger’s seat,
activating the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag even though that seat is
occupied by a child.
. Do not place any article on the seat
other than the child occupant and a child
restraint system.
. Do not place more than one child on
the seat.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
pull the seatback.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (70,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the
OFF indicator extinguishes even
when an infant or a small child is in
a child restraint system (including
booster seat)
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position if the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator illuminates and the
OFF indicator extinguishes even when an
infant or a small child is in a child restraint
system (including booster seat). Remove
the child restraint system from the seat. By
referring to the child restraint manufacturer’s recommendations as well as the
child restraint system installation procedures in the “Child restraint systems”
section in this chapter, correctly install
the child restraint system. Turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” position and make sure
that the front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator goes out and the OFF
indicator comes on.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator extinguishes, take
the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint system
and the child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth.
If the ON indicator still illuminates while
the OFF indicator extinguishes after taking
relevant corrective actions described
above, relocate the child restraint system
to the rear seat and immediately contact
your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
the Subaru advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupant’s seating
posture. If the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag is activated (the ON
indicator illuminates while the OFF
indicator extinguishes), take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on
the seat other than the occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in
the seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator still illuminates while
the OFF indicator extinguishes despite
the fact that the actions noted above
have been taken, seat the child/small
adult in the rear seat and immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection. Even if the system has
passed the dealer inspection, it is
recommended that on subsequent trips
the child/small adult always take the
rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passenger’s seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When a heavy article is placed on the
seat.
When the front passenger’s seat is occupied by an adult, observe the following
precautions. Failure to do so may lessen
the load on the front passenger’s seat,
deactivating the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat
is occupied by an adult.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
Black plate (71,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
lift the front passenger’s seat cushion
using his/her feet.
. Do not place any article under the front
passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article
from behind and under the seat. This may
lift the seat cushion.
. Do not squeeze any article between
the front passenger’s seat and side trim/
pillar, door or center console box. This
may lift the seat cushion.
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator illuminates and the ON
indicator extinguishes even when
the front passenger’s seat is occupied by an adult
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position. Ask the front passenger to set
the seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position. Turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF
indicator remains illuminated while the ON
indicator remains extinguished, take the
following actions.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
. Ensure that there are no articles,
books, shoes, or other objects trapped
under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or
on the side of the seat.
. Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth.
. Next, turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow
the system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both indicators extinguish for 2 seconds. Now, the
ON indicator should illuminate while the
OFF indicator remains extinguished.
If the OFF indicator still illuminates while
the ON indicator remains extinguished,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
! Effect vehicle modifications made
for persons with disabilities may
have on Subaru advanced frontal
airbag system operation (U.S. only)
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, seatbelts, front bumper, front side
frame, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire,
suspension or floor panel can affect the
operation of the Subaru advanced airbag
system. If you have any questions, you
may contact the following Subaru distributors:
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Dealer Services Department
P.O. Box 6000
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Schuman Inc, dba Subaru of Hawaii
740 Halekauwila Street Honolulu, HI
96813
808-591-3075

Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automobile
491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
Guam
671-633-2698

Trebol Motors
P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00910
787-793-2828
There are currently no Subaru distributors
in any other U.S. territories. If you are in
such an area, please contact the Subaru
distributor or dealer from which you
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (72,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
bought your vehicle. ! Operation
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
Black plate (73,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
The SRS airbag can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The Subaru advanced frontal airbag system is designed to determine the activation or deactivation condition of the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag depending on the total load on the front passenger’s seat monitored by the front passenger’s occupant detection system weight
sensor. For this reason, only the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the
event of a collision, but this does not mean
failure of the system.
If the front sub sensors inside both front
fenders and the impact sensors in the
airbag control module detect a predetermined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front passenger’s modules) instructing the module(s)
to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags use dual stage inflators.
The two inflators of each airbag are
triggered either sequentially or simultaneously, depending on the severity of
impact, backward-forward adjustment of
the driver’s seat position and fastening/
unfastening of the seatbelt in the case of
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the
total load on the seat in the case of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. After
deployment, the SRS airbag immediately
starts to deflate so that the driver’s vision
is not obstructed. The time required from
detecting impact to the deflation of the
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye.
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners operate at the same time.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS
airbag would activate in a non-accident
situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag
will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision
and will not interfere with the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
some smoke will be released. These
occurrences are a normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate
a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components around the steering
wheel and dashboard with bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are designed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe
frontal collision. It is basically not designed
to deploy in lesser frontal impacts because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
are basically not designed to deploy in
side or rear impacts or in roll-over accidents because deployment of only the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
would not help the occupant in those
situations. The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to
function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (74,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Example of accident in which the
driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most
likely deploy.
A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which it is possible that the
driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy.
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
Black plate (75,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which deployment of the driver’s/
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). If the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a telephone pole or
sign pole, or if it slides under a truck’s load
bed, or if it sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact, the driver’s/driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
may not deploy depending on the level of
accident forces involved.
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which the driver’s/driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will basically not deploy.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are designed basically not
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (76,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the
side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
side or roof, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will not
be activated on the second impact.
& SRS side airbag
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
head.
WARNING
The SRS side airbag is designed as
only a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt.
They do not do away with the need
to fasten seatbelts. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help
avoid injuries that can result when
an occupant is not seated in a
proper upright position.
WARNING
Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The SRS
side airbag is stored in both front
seat seatbacks next to the door, and
it provides protection by deploying
rapidly (faster than the blink of an
eye) in the event of a side impact
collision. However, the force of SRS
side airbag deployment may cause
injuries if your head or other parts of
the body are too close to the SRS
side airbag.
Black plate (77,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
WARNING
Do not rest your arm on either front
door or its internal trim. It could be
injured in the event of SRS side
airbag deployment.
WARNING
Never allow a child to kneel on the
front passenger’s seat facing the
side window or to wrap his/her arms
around the front seat seatback. In
the event of an accident, the force of
the SRS side airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head or arms or
other parts of the body are too close
to the SRS side airbag. Since your
vehicle is also equipped with a
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag,
children aged 12 and under should
be placed in the rear seat anyway
and should be properly restrained at
all times.
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (78,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
event of the SRS side airbag deployment, they could be propelled dangerously toward the vehicle’s occupants and cause injuries.
WARNING
Do not put any kind of cover or
clothes or other objects over either
front seatback and do not attach
labels or stickers to the front seat
surface on or near the SRS side
airbag. They could prevent proper
deployment of the SRS side airbag,
reducing protection available to the
front seat’s occupant.
! Operation
1) SRS side airbag deploys as soon as a
collision occurs.
2) SRS side airbag protects the front
passenger’s head and chest.
3) After deployment, SRS side airbag starts
to deflate immediately.
The SRS side airbag can function only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
side airbags deploy independently of each
other since each has its own impact
sensor. Also, the SRS side airbag deploys
independently of the frontal airbags in the
steering wheel and instrument panel.
An impact sensor is incorporated into
each of the vehicle’s center pillars. If
either sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force during a side
impact collision, the control module sends
a signal to the side airbag module on the
impacted side of the vehicle, instructing it
to inflate the SRS side airbag. Then the
side airbag module produces gas, which
instantly inflates the SRS side airbag.
After deployment, the SRS side airbag
will deflate in a few seconds.
The SRS side airbag deploys even when
no one occupies the seat on the side on
which an impact is applied.
When the SRS side airbag deploys, a
sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be
heard and some smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal result of
the deployment. This smoke does not
indicate a fire in the vehicle.
Black plate (79,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag
system components around the
front seat seatback with bare hands
right after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
The SRS side airbag is designed to
deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe side impact
collision. It is basically not designed to
deploy in a lesser side impact. Also, it is
basically not designed to deploy in frontal
or rear impacts because SRS side airbag
deployment would not help the occupant
in those situations.
Each SRS side airbag is designed to
function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS side airbag deployment depends on
the level of force experienced in the
passenger compartment during a side
impact collision. That level differs from
one type of collision to another, and it may
have no bearing on the visible damage
done to the vehicle itself.
! Example of the type of accident in
which the SRS side airbag will most
likely deploy.
A severe side impact near the front seat
activates the SRS side airbag.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (80,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to
deploy.
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
Black plate (81,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which the SRS side airbag will
basically not deploy.
1) The vehicle is involved in a frontal
collision with another vehicle (moving or
stationary).
2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
The SRS side airbag is basically not
designed to deploy if the vehicle is
involved in a frontal collision or is struck
from behind. Examples of such accidents
are illustrated.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag deploys only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
is activated on the first impact, it will not be
activated on the second.
& SRS airbag system monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including front seatbelt pretensioners)
while the vehicle is being driven. The
SRS airbag system warning light “AIRBAG” will show normal system operation
by lighting for approximately 6 seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
The following components are monitored
by the indicator:
. Front sub sensor (Right-hand side)
. Front sub sensor (Left-hand side)
. Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
. Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)
. Frontal airbag module (Front passenSeat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (82,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
ger’s side)
. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar righthand side)
. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar lefthand side)
. Side airbag module (Driver’s side)
. Side airbag module (Front passenger’s
side)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passenger’s side)
. Seatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side)
. Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passenger’s side)
. Driver’s seat position sensor
. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension
sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in
the event of a collision, which may
increase the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warning light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
& SRS airbag system servicing
WARNING
. When discarding an airbag module or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no userserviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, see your nearest
SUBARU dealer. Tampering with
or disconnecting the system’s
wiring could result in accidental
inflation of the SRS airbag or
could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious
injury. The wiring harnesses of
the SRS airbag system are covered with yellow insulation and
system connectors are yellow for
easy identification.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
listed in the following, have an
authorized SUBARU dealer perform
the work. The SRS airbag control
module, impact sensors and airbag
modules are stored in these areas.
. Under the center console
. Inside each front fender
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’s side and nearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
Black plate (83,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
. Inside each center pillar
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the components of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
To ensure their long-term reliability, the
SRS airbags must be inspected by a
SUBARU dealer ten years after the date
of manufacture, which is shown on the
certification plate attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad section of the steering
wheel or front passenger’s frontal airbag cover is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
In addition, if your vehicle is equipped
with SRS side airbags, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible in
the following cases.
. Either center pillar or a nearby area
of the vehicle was involved in an
accident in which the SRS side airbag
did not deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
WARNING
. To avoid accidental activation of
the system or rendering the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifications should be made to any
components or wiring of the SRS
airbag system.
This includes following modifications:
. Installation of custom steering
wheels
. Attachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
. Installation of custom seats
. Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
. Installation of additional fabric
or leather on the front seat
. Installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment
such as a mobile two-way
radio on or near the SRS
airbag system components
and/or wiring is not advisable.
This could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag
system.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this OwnSeat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (84,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
er’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts on
your vehicle.
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2
Key number plate................................................ 2-2
Immobilizer (Turbo models)................................ 2-3
Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4
Key replacement ................................................. 2-4
Door locks ........................................................... 2-4
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-4
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-5
Power door locking switches............................. 2-6
Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-7
Locking the doors ............................................... 2-7
Unlocking the doors ............................................ 2-8
Illuminated entry ................................................. 2-8
Vehicle finder function......................................... 2-8
Sounding a panic alarm....................................... 2-8
Selecting audible signal operation ....................... 2-8
Replacing the battery .......................................... 2-9
Replacing lost transmitters ................................. 2-10
Alarm system ..................................................... 2-13
System operation ............................................... 2-13
Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-13
If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................ 2-14
Arming the system ............................................ 2-14
Disarming the system ........................................ 2-15
Valet mode ........................................................ 2-16
Passive arming.................................................. 2-16
Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-17
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-17
Child safety locks .............................................. 2-18
Windows............................................................. 2-18
Power windows ................................................. 2-18
Trunk lid (Sedan) ............................................... 2-20
To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-21
To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-21
To cancel the trunk lid release ........................... 2-21
Internal trunk lid release handle ......................... 2-21
Rear gate (Wagon) ............................................. 2-23
Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-24
Tilt function ....................................................... 2-24
Sliding function ................................................. 2-25
Sun shade ......................................................... 2-26
Keys and doors
2
Black plate (86,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-2 Keys and doors
Keys
Turbo models
1) Master key (Black)
2) Submaster key (Black)
3) Valet key (Gray)
4) Key number plate
5) Security ID plate
Non-turbo models
1) Master key
2) Submaster key
3) Valet key
4) Key number plate
Three types of keys are provided for your
vehicle:
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all
locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
. Doors
. Trunk (Sedan)
. Glove box
The valet key fits only the ignition switch
and driver’s door lock. You can keep the
trunk and glove box locked when you
leave your vehicle and valet key at a
parking facility.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the ON position to the
Acc or OFF position, thereby stopping the engine.
& Key number plate
The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set.
Write down the key number and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle.
Black plate (87,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Immobilizer (Turbo models)
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. Even if
an unregistered key fits into the ignition
switch and can be turned to the “START”
position, the engine will automatically stop
after several seconds.
Each immobilizer key contains a transponder in which the key’s ID code is
stored. When a key is inserted into the
ignition switch and turned to the “ON”
position, the transponder transmits the
key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
receiver. If the transmitted ID code
matches the ID code registered in the
immobilizer system, the system allows the
engine to be started. Since the ID code is
transmitted and acted upon almost instantly, the immobilizer system does not
impede normal starting of the engine.
If the engine fails to start, pull out the key
once before trying again. (Refer to the
“Ignition switch” section in chapter 3.)
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE
To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the following security precautions:
. Never leave your vehicle unattended
with its keys inside.
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
windows and lock the doors and rear
gate.
. Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may
become hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
& Security ID plate
1) Key number plate
2) Security ID plate
The security ID is stamped on the security
ID plate attached to the key set. Write
down the security ID and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle.
This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it
inside the vehicle.
This number is also needed for replacement or repair of the engine control unit,
immobilizer control unit.
Keys and doors 2-3
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (88,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-4 Keys and doors
& Security indicator light
The security indicator light deters potential
thieves by indicating that the vehicle is
equipped with an immobilizer system. It
begins flashing (approximately once every
3 seconds) approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned from the
“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
position or immediately after the key is
pulled out.
If the security indicator light does not flash,
the immobilizer system may be faulty. If
this occurs, we recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.
an imitation key), the security indicator
light comes on.
NOTE
Even if the security indicator light
flashes irregularly or its fuse blows
(the light does not flash if its fuse is
blown), the immobilizer system will
function normally.
& Key replacement
Your key number plate and security ID
plate will be required if you ever need a
replacement key made. Any new key must
be registered for use with your vehicle’s
immobilizer system before it can be used.
Up to four keys can be registered for use
with one vehicle.
For security, all the keys registered with
your vehicle’s immobilizer system will
have their ID codes erased and reregistered when a new key is made.
Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must
be presented when a new key is registered. Any key that is not re-registered
when a new key is made cannot be used
after the other keys are re-registered. For
information on replacement keys and on
the registration of keys with your immobilizer system, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
Door locks
& Locking and unlocking from
the outside
To lock the driver’s door from the outside
with the key, turn the key toward the rear.
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
front.
Pull the outside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Black plate (89,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside without
the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and
then close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the
power door locking switch, push the front
side of the switch (“LOCK” side) and then
close the door. In this case, all closed
doors and the rear gate (for Wagon) are
locked at the same time.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate (for Wagon) are locked before
leaving your vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle when locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
& Locking and unlocking from
the inside
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
lock lever rearward. To unlock the door
from the inside, rotate the lock lever
forward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate (for Wagon) are closed before
starting to drive.
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small children are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seatbelts and child restraints, locking
the doors reduces the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out if a door is accidentally opened, and intruders from
unexpectedly opening doors and
entering your vehicle.
& Key lock-in prevention function
This function prevents the doors from
being locked with the key still in the
ignition switch.
! Behavior with key lock-in prevention function operative
With the driver’s door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
door locking switch is pushed to the front
(“LOCK”) position.
Keys and doors 2-5
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (90,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-6 Keys and doors
! Behavior with key lock-in prevention function non-operative
. If the lock lever is turned to the rear
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
open and the driver’s door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
driver’s door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door from the outside of the
vehicle, the door is locked.
This function’s operative/non-operative
setting can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Contact a SUBARU dealer for
details.
NOTE
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
Power door locking switches
1) Lock
2) Unlock
All doors and the rear gate (for Wagon)
can be locked and unlocked by the power
door locking switches located at the
driver’s side and the front passenger’s
side doors.
To lock the doors, push the front side of
the switch.
To unlock the doors, push the rear side of
the switch.
When you close the doors after you set
the door locks, the doors remain locked.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
Black plate (91,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Remote keyless entry system
Two transmitters are provided for your
vehicle.
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
. Locking and unlocking the doors (and
rear gate on the Wagon) without a key
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming the alarm system. See the next section “Alarm system”
for detailed information.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
The operable distance of the keyless entry
system is approximately 30 feet (10
meters). However, this distance will vary
depending on environmental conditions.
The system’s operable distance will be
shorter in areas near a facility or electronic
equipment emitting strong radio waves
such as a power plant, broadcast station,
TV tower, or remote controller of home
electronic appliances.
The remote keyless entry system does not
operate when the key is inserted in the
ignition switch to prevent accidental lockout.
CAUTION
. Do not expose the transmitter to
severe shocks, such as those
experienced as a result of dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the transmitter apart
except when replacing the battery.
. Do not get the transmitter wet. If it
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
: LOCK/ARM button
Press to Lock all doors.
Press and Hold to activate panic
alarm.
Press 3 times in a 5-second period to
use vehicle finder function.
: UNLOCK/DISARM button
1) Press once to Unlock driver’s door.
2) Press a second time to Unlock all
other doors (and rear gate on the
Wagon).
& Locking the doors
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than 2
seconds) to lock all doors (and rear gate
on the Wagon).
An electronic chirp will sound once and
the turn signal lights will flash once.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate) is not
Keys and doors 2-7
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (92,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-8 Keys and doors
fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound
five times and the turn signal lights will
flash five times to alert you that the doors
(or the rear gate) are not properly closed.
When you close the door, it will automatically lock.
NOTE
If the “ ” button is pressed for 2
seconds or longer, the panic alarm will
sound. When locking the doors in
normal circumstances, press the “ ”
button for less than 2 seconds. For
details on the panic alarm, refer to
“Sounding a panic alarm”.
& Unlocking the doors
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than
2 seconds) to unlock the driver’s door. An
electronic chirp will sound twice and the
turn signal lights will flash twice.
To unlock all other doors (and rear gate on
the Wagon), briefly press the “ ” button a
second time within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the “ ” button (for
unlocking of all of the doors and the
rear gate) is extremely short, the system may not respond.
& Illuminated entry
The interior lights (dome and cargo area
lights) will illuminate when the “ ” button
is pressed. These lights stay illuminated
for approximately 30 seconds if any of the
doors (or the rear gate on the Wagon) is
not opened.
If the “ ” button is pressed before 30
seconds have elapsed, these lights will go
out. Also, these lights will go out if the key
is turned to the “ON” position. The interior
light switch must be set to the DOOR
position in order for this function to
operate.
& Vehicle finder function
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “ ”
button three times in a five-second period
will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound
once and its turn signal lights to flash three
times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “ ” button
three times, the system may not respond to the signals from the remote
transmitter.
& Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, keep the “ ” button
pressed for more than 2 seconds. The
horn will sound and the turn signal lights
will flash.
To deactivate it, press the “ ” button or
“ ” button. Unless a button on the remote
is pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 30 seconds.
& Selecting audible signal operation
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off.
Do the following to deactivate the audible
signal. You can also use the same steps
to restore the function.
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate.
2. Open the driver’s door, then remove
the key from the ignition switch.
3. Hold down the “UNLOCK” side of the
power door locking switch.
4. While holding down the “UNLOCK”
side of the power door locking switch,
insert the key into the ignition switch and
remove it again at least 6 times within 10
seconds after Step 3.
5. While still holding down the “UNLOCK”
Black plate (93,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
side of the power door locking switch,
close the driver’s door once within 10
seconds after Step 4.
6. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to
indicate completion of the setting.
NOTE
If you do not close the driver’s door
within 10 seconds after Step 4, a flash
of the turn signal lights will signal
timeout. If this happens, repeat the
whole procedure from Step 1.
You may have the above settings done by
your SUBARU dealer.
& Replacing the battery
When the transmitter battery begins to get
weak, transmitter range will begin to
decrease. Replace the battery as soon
as possible.
To replace the battery:
1. Open the transmitter case using a flathead screwdriver.
2. Remove the old battery from the
holder.
1) Negative (−) side facing up
3. Replace with a new battery (Type
CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to
install the new battery with the negative
(−) side facing up.
4. Reinstall the back half of the transmitter case by snapping it back on.
After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must be synchronized with the
keyless entry system’s control unit.
Press either the “ ” or “ ” button six
times to synchronize the unit.
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the transmitter when replacing battery.
Keys and doors 2-9
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (94,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-10 Keys and doors
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the transmitter when replacing the battery.
& Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), you should reprogram all of your transmitters for security reasons. It is recommended that you
have your dealer program all of your
transmitters into your system.
! Programming the transmitters
The keyless entry system is equipped with
a special code learning feature that allows
you to program new transmitter codes into
the system or to delete old ones. The
system can learn up to four unique
transmitter codes. The four transmitter
codes may be the same or different.
Programming transmitter codes into
system:
Bag containing transmitter
Transmitter circuit board
To register a new transmitter with the
keyless entry system, it is necessary to
program the transmitter’s code (identification number) into the system. A label
showing the code is affixed to the bag
containing the transmitter, and another is
affixed to the circuit board inside the
transmitter. If there is no bag, open the
transmitter case and make a note of the
eight-digit number. Program the number
into the system in accordance with the
following procedure:
1. Firmly close the doors and the rear
gate, or trunk lid.
2. Open the driver’s door, sit on the
driver’s seat, and close the door.
3. Perform the following steps within 45
seconds.
(1) Open and close the driver’s door
once.
Black plate (95,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1) ON
2) LOCK
(2) Insert the key into the ignition
switch, then turn it from the “LOCK”
position to the “ON” position 10 times
within 15 seconds.
NOTE
. When you complete step (2), an
electronic tone will sound once.
. If you do not perform steps (1) and
(2) within 45 seconds, an error will
occur. Neither an electronic tone nor
the buzzer will sound, and the interior
lamp will not flash. In this event, perform the whole procedure again beginning with part 1.
4. Open and close the door once within
15 seconds.
NOTE
. When part 4 of the procedure is
completed, an electronic tone will
sound for 30 seconds.
. If you do not perform the operations
in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error
will occur and the electronic tone will
not sound. In this event, perform the
registration steps again beginning with
part 3 of the procedure.
5. Before the electronic tone stops
sounding, push the lock side of the power
door lock switch the same number of
times as the leftmost digit of the transmitter code. For example, push the lock
switch eight times if the leftmost digit of
the code is 8.
NOTE
. The electronic tone will stop sounding when you start entering the number.
. If you do not start entering the
number using the lock switch before
the electronic tone stops sounding, an
error will occur. In this event, perform
the registration steps again beginning
with part 3 of the procedure.
. If the interval between one push of
the switch and the next exceeds 5
seconds, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
6. When you have finished entering the
number, push the unlock side of the lock
Keys and doors 2-11
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (96,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-12 Keys and doors
switch within 5 seconds.
NOTE
. An electronic tone will sound.
. If you push the unlock side of the
lock switch when more than 5 seconds
have passed, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure
for each of the remaining digits of the
transmitter code beginning with the second digit (counting from the left) and
finishing with the eighth digit.
NOTE
. When you finish entering the eighth
digit, an electronic tone will sound for
30 seconds.
. If the interval between one push of
the switch and the next exceeds 5
seconds, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
8. Before the electronic tone stops
sounding, use the power door lock switch
to reenter the transmitter code beginning
with the leftmost digit.
NOTE
If you do not start entering the number
using the lock switch before the electronic tone stops sounding, an error
will occur. In this event, perform the
procedure again beginning with part 3.
9. When you have finished entering the
code a second time, an electronic tone will
sound for one second and automatic door
locking and unlocking operation will take
place once to indicate completion of
registration, provided the code entered
the second time is identical to that entered
the first time.
NOTE
If the code entered the second time is
not identical to the code entered the
first time, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 5. If an error occurs
five times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
10. If you wish to program another transmitter code into the system (up to four
transmitter codes can be programmed into
the system), perform the procedure beginning with part 4. When you have finished
programming all of the necessary transmitter codes into the system, remove the
key from the ignition switch.
11. Test every registered transmitter to
confirm correct operation.
! Deleting old transmitter codes
The control unit of the keyless entry
system has four memory locations to store
transmitter codes, giving it the ability to
operate with up to four transmitters. When
you lose a transmitter, the lost transmitter’s code remains in the memory. For
security reasons, lost transmitter codes
should be deleted from the memory.
To delete old transmitter codes, program
four transmitter codes into the system. If
you have only one current transmitter,
program it four times. If you have two
current transmitters, program each one
twice. If you have three current transmitters, program two of them once and the
third one twice. This process will leave
only current transmitter codes in the
system’s memory.
NOTE
Make sure no one else is operating
their keyless entry system within range
of your vehicle when programming
transmitters. If someone else were to
operate their remote transmitter while
you are programming your transmitters, it is possible that their transmitter
code will be programmed into your
Black plate (97,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
system, allowing them unauthorized
access to your vehicle.
Alarm system
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the turn signal lights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle. The starter motor is also interrupted to prevent starting the vehicle
without a key.
The system can be armed and disarmed
with the remote transmitter.
The system does not operate when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
& System operation
The alarm system will give the following
alarms when triggered:
. The vehicle’s horn will sound and the
turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds.
In addition, the starter motor will not
operate.
. If any door (or the rear gate/trunk lid)
remains open after the 30-second period,
the horn will continue to sound for a
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door (or
the rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while the
horn is sounding, the horn will stop
sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
The alarm is triggered by:
. Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk
lid
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
forced entry (only vehicles with shock
sensors (dealer option))
& Activating and deactivating
the alarm system
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactivation, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system (see “Disarming the system” in this section).
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors (and the rear gate if your vehicle is a
wagon).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the
driver’s power door locking switch, open
the driver’s door within the following 1
second, and wait 10 seconds without
releasing the switch. The setting will then
be changed as follows:
If the system was previously activated:
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
Keys and doors 2-13
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (98,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-14 Keys and doors
“AL oF” and the horn sounds twice,
indicating that the system is now deactivated.
If the system was previously deactivated:
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
“AL on” and the horn sounds once,
indicating that the system is now activated.
NOTE
You may have the above setting
change done by your SUBARU dealer.
& If you have accidentally triggered the alarm system
! To stop the alarm
Do any of the following operations:
. Press any button on the remote transmitter.
. Cycle the ignition switch from the
“LOCK” to “ON” position three times within
5 seconds.
& Arming the system
! To arm the system using remote
transmitter
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
so equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and
the trunk lid) are locked.
5. Close all doors (and the rear gate on
the Wagon).
: Press to Arm the system.
: Press to Disarm the system.
Security indicator light
6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less
than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear
gate on the Wagon) will lock, an electronic
chirp will sound once, the turn signal lights
will flash once, and the indicator lights will
start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing
for 30 seconds (standby time), the indicator lights will then flash slowly (twice
approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the system has been armed for
surveillance.
If any of the doors, (rear gate or trunk lid)
is not fully closed, an electronic chirp
sounds five times, the turn signal lights
flash five times to alert you that the doors
(or the rear gate) are not properly closed.
When you close the door, the system will
automatically arm and doors will automaBlack plate (99,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
tically lock.
! To arm the system using power
door locking switches
1. Close all windows.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close the doors (and the rear gate on
the Wagon) but leave only the driver’s
door or the front passenger’s door open.
6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) of
the power door locking switch to set the
door locks.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
sound once, the turn signal lights will flash
once and the indicator lights will start
flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30
seconds (standby time), the indicator
lights will then flash slowly (twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that
the system has been armed for surveillance.
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
engine hood, the windows and/or
moonroof are opened. Always make
sure that they are fully closed before
arming the system.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it performed by your SUBARU dealer.
. The system is in the standby mode
for a 30-second period after locking the
doors with the remote transmitter. The
security indicator light will flash at
short intervals during this period.
. If any of the following actions are
done during the standby period, the
system will not switch to the surveillance state.
. Doors are unlocked using the
remote transmitter.
. Any door (including the rear gate
of a Wagon or the trunk of a Sedan)
is opened.
. Ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The engine does not start even
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “START” position once the alarm
system has been triggered.
& Disarming the system
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than
2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The
driver’s door will unlock, an electronic
chirp will sound twice, the turn signal
lights will flash twice and the indicator
light will go off.
NOTE (Models with immobilizer)
If your vehicle is equipped with an
immobilizer, the immobilizer’s function
will cause the security indicator light to
flash (approximately once every 3
seconds) even after the system is
disarmed.
NOTE
The system can be disarmed by the
following method, too.
. Cycle the ignition switch from the
“LOCK” to the “ON” position three
times within 5 seconds.
Keys and doors 2-15
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (100,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-16 Keys and doors
! Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the
transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,
broken or the transmitter battery is too
weak), you can disarm the system without
using the transmitter.
1. Unlock the door with the key and then
open the door.
2. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and cycle it from the “LOCK” to the “ON”
position three times within 5 seconds.
& Valet mode
When you choose the valet mode, the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the remote transmitter is used only
for locking and unlocking the doors and
rear gate (Wagon) and panic activation.
To enter the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
deactivation mode. (Refer to “Activating
and deactivating the alarm system” in this
section.) The security indicator light will
continue to flash once every 3 seconds
indicating that the system is in the valet
mode (only vehicle with an immobilizer).
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
mode. (Refer to “Activating and deactivating the alarm system” in this section.)
NOTE
If your vehicle is not equipped with an
immobilizer, the security indicator light
does not flash during the valet mode.
& Passive arming
When passive arming mode has been
programmed by the dealer, arming of the
system is automatically accomplished
without using the remote transmitter. Note
that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
MANUALLY LOCKED.
! To enter the passive mode
If you wish to program the passive arming
mode, have it done by your SUBARU
dealer.
! Arming the system
CAUTION
In passive mode, the system will
automatically activate the alarm but
WILL NOT automatically lock the
doors. In order to lock the doors
you must either lock them as indicated in step 4 below or with the
key once they have been closed.
Failure to lock the doors manually
will result in a higher security risk.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
1) ON
2) LOCK
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to
“LOCK” position and remove the key from
the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
Black plate (101,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors
with the inside door lock levers.
5. Close the doors. The system will
automatically arm after one minute.
In the passive mode, the system can also
be armed with the remote transmitter or
with the power door locking switches. If
the remote transmitter or power door
locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,
arming will take place immediately regardless of whether or not the passive mode
has been selected.
! Disarming the system
To disarm the system, briefly press the
“ ” button on the transmitter.
& Tripped sensor identification
The security indicator light flashes when
the alarm system has been triggered.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the
location of unauthorized intrusion or the
severity of impact on the vehicle.
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position, the indicator light will
light for 1 second and then flash as
follows:
When a door or rear gate (Wagon) or
the trunk (Sedan) was opened: 5 times
When the ignition switch was turned to
the “ON” position: 3 times
When a strong impact or multiple
impacts were sensed: twice (only
vehicles with shock sensors (dealer
option))
When a light impact was sensed: once
(only vehicles with shock sensors
(dealer option))
NOTE
Any of the above indicator light flashings will recur each time the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
Rearming the alarm system cancels the
flashing.
& Shock sensors (dealer option)
The shock sensors trigger the alarm
system when they sense impacts applied
to the vehicle and when any of their
electric wires are cut. The alarm system
causes the horn to sound and the turn
signal lights to flash for a short time when
the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of
a strong impact or multiple impacts by
sounding the horn and flashing the turn
signal lights, both lasting approximately 30
seconds.
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
connect them and set them for activation
or deactivation.
NOTE
. The shock sensors are not always
able to sense impacts caused by breaking in, and cannot sense an impact that
does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the glass using a rescue
hammer).
. The shock sensors may sense vibration like those shown in the following and trigger the alarm system.
Select the settings of the alarm system
and shock sensors appropriately depending on where you usually park
your vehicle.
Keys and doors 2-17
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (102,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-18 Keys and doors
Example:
Vibration from construction site
Vibration in multistory car park
Vibration from trains
. You can have the sensitivity of the
shock sensors adjusted to your preference by your SUBARU dealer.
Child safety locks
Each rear door has a child safety lock that
prevents the doors from being opened
even if the inside door handle is pulled.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
lock position, the door cannot be opened
from inside regardless of the position of
the inner door handle lock lever. The door
can only be opened from the outside.
WARNING
Always use the child safety lock
whenever a child rides in the rear
seat. Serious injury could result if a
child accidentally opened the door
and fell out.
Windows
& Power windows
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, you must
do the following.
. When operating the power windows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck or head from being caught
in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ windows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operating the power window.
The power windows operate only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Black plate (103,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
! Driver’s side switches
1) Lock switch
2) For driver’s window (with one-touch auto
down feature)
3) For front passenger’s window
4) For rear left window
5) For rear right window
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster at the driver
side door.
! Operating the driver’s window
1) Open
2) Automatically open
3) Close
To open:
Push the switch down lightly and hold it.
The window will open as long as the
switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto
down feature that allows the window to be
opened fully without holding the switch.
Push the switch down until it clicks and
release it, and the window will fully open.
To stop the window halfway, pull the
switch up lightly.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
held.
! Operating the passengers’ windows
To open the passengers’ windows, push
the appropriate switch down and hold it
until the window reaches the desired
position.
To close the window, pull the switch up
and hold it until it reaches the desired
position.
Keys and doors 2-19
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (104,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-20 Keys and doors
! Locking the passengers’ windows
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To lock the passengers’ windows, push
the lock switch. When the lock switch is in
the “LOCK” position, the passengers’
windows cannot be opened or closed.
Press the switch again to cancel the
passengers’ window locking.
! Passengers’ side switches
To open the window, push the switch
down and hold it until the window reaches
the desired position.
To close the window, pull the switch up
and hold it until the window reaches the
desired position.
When the lock switch on the power
window switch cluster, located on the
driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK”
position, the passengers’ windows cannot
be operated with the passengers ’
switches.
Trunk lid (Sedan)
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the trunk lid closed
while driving.
. Help prevent young children from
locking themselves in the trunk.
When leaving the vehicle, either
close all windows and lock all
doors or cancel the inside trunk
lid release. Also make certain
that the trunk is closed.
On hot or sunny days, the temperature in the trunk could
quickly become high enough to
cause death or serious heatrelated injuries including brain
damage to anyone locked inside,
particularly for small children.
Black plate (105,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& To open and close the trunk
lid from outside
To open the trunk lid from outside, insert
the key and turn it clockwise.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
trunk lid down until the latch engages.
& To open the trunk lid from
inside
Pull the trunk lid release lever upward.
& To cancel the trunk lid release
The inside trunk lid release can be
canceled to prevent unauthorized entry
into the trunk. To cancel the trunk lid
release, set the lid release cancel lever
(located on the inside of the trunk lid,
mounted to the trunk lid latch) to the
“CANCEL” position. When this lock is in
the “CANCEL” position, the trunk can be
opened only with the key.
& Internal trunk lid release
handle
The internal trunk lid release handle is a
device designed to open the trunk lid from
inside the trunk. In the event children or
adults become locked inside the trunk, the
Keys and doors 2-21
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (106,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-22 Keys and doors
handle allows them to open the lid. The
handle is located on the inside of the trunk
lid.
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,
press the yellow handle downward as
indicated by the arrow on the handle.
This operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then,
push up the lid.
The handle is made of material that
remains luminescent for approximately
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
exposed to ambient light even for a short
time.
WARNING
Never allow any child to get in the
trunk and play with the release
handle. If the driver starts the vehicle without knowing that a child is
inside the trunk and the child opens
the lid using the release handle, the
child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while gripping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk.
Such use may result in damage
of the handle.
. Load the trunk so that cargo can
not strike the release handle. If
the cargo hits the handle while
the vehicle is being driven, the
handle may be pushed down and
the trunk lid may open. That may
cause cargo to fall out of the
trunk, which could create a traffic
safety hazard.
! Inspection
Perform the following steps at least twice
a year to check the release handle for
correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Use a screwdriver with a thin blade.
Slide the screwdriver blade from the slit
aperture of the lock assembly fully to the
end until you hear a click.
Black plate (107,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
This places the latch in the locked position.
3. Move the release handle, from outside
the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to
check if the latch is released.
If the latch is not released, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
In that case, use the key to release the
latch, then close the trunk lid.
Also, if the movement of the release
handle feels restricted or not entirely
smooth during operation, or the handle
and/or handle base is cracked, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
Rear gate (Wagon)
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using either the keyless entry system or
the power door locking switches.
Refer to the “Power door locking switches”
and “Remote keyless entry system” section in this chapter.
To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear
gate lock then pull the outside handle up.
Then, hold the rear gate and raise it as
high as it will go.
Keys and doors 2-23
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (108,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-24 Keys and doors
To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and
push down firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
pull it down holding the recessed grip.
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while driving.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the recessed
grip. Also avoid closing the rear
gate by pulling on the recessed
grip from inside the cargo space.
There is a danger of your hand
being caught and injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when opening or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading cargo.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
to a discharged battery, a fault in the
door locking/unlocking system or other
causes, you can unlock it by manually
operating the rear gate lock release
lever.
For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate –
if the rear gate cannot be unlocked”
section in chapter 9 “In case of emergency”.
Moonroof (if equipped)
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
& Tilt function
1) Tilt up
2) Tilt down
The tilting function will only operate when
the moonroof is fully closed.
Push the rear side of the “Tilt” switch to
raise the moonroof.
Push the front side of the “Tilt” switch to
lower the moonroof.
Release the switch after the moonroof has
Black plate (109,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
been raised or has been lowered completely. Pushing the switch continuously
may cause damage to the moonroof.
& Sliding function
1) Open
2) Close
Push the “Open/Close” switch rearward to
open the moonroof. The sun shade will
also be opened together with the moonroof.
Push the “Open/Close” switch forward to
close the moonroof. The moonroof will
stop halfway if you continue to press on
the switch. Release the switch once and
push it again to close the moonroof
completely.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops
of water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
If the moonroof cannot be closed
through switch operation because of
system failure, it can be closed manually using a hex-head wrench. For the
procedure, refer to “Moonroof – if the
moonroof cannot be closed” section in
chapter 9 “In case of emergency”.
WARNING
. Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude
from the moonroof. A person
could be seriously injured if the
vehicle stops suddenly or turns
sharply or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, you must
do the following.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operating the moonroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
Keys and doors 2-25
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (110,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
2-26 Keys and doors
& Sun shade
The sun shade can be slid forward or
backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3
Acc..................................................................... 3-4
ON...................................................................... 3-4
START ................................................................ 3-4
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5
Ignition switch light ............................................. 3-5
Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) ............... 3-5
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-6
Meters and gauges (WRX-STI) ........................... 3-6
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-6
Canceling sequential illumination of the
combination meter ............................................ 3-6
Speedometer....................................................... 3-7
Odometer/Trip meter............................................ 3-7
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7
Fuel gauge.......................................................... 3-8
Temperature gauge ............................................. 3-8
Outside temperature indicator ............................. 3-9
REV indicator light and buzzer (WRX-STI) ........ 3-9
Setting the alarm-level engine speed................... 3-10
Deactivating the REV alarm system..................... 3-11
Meters and gauges (Except WRX-STI).............. 3-11
Speedometer...................................................... 3-11
Odometer/Trip meter........................................... 3-11
Tachometer ........................................................ 3-12
Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-12
Temperature gauge ............................................ 3-13
Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-13
Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-14
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-14
SRS airbag system warning light........................ 3-14
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators ........................................................ 3-15
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator lamp ................................................. 3-16
Charge warning light.......................................... 3-16
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-16
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light
(AT vehicles).................................................... 3-17
Rear differential oil temperature warning light
(WRX-STI)........................................................ 3-17
ABS warning light.............................................. 3-17
Brake system warning light................................ 3-18
Door open warning light .................................... 3-19
All-Wheel Drive warning light (AWD AT vehicles –
if equipped) ..................................................... 3-19
Intercooler water spray warning light
(WRX-STI)........................................................ 3-19
Selector lever position indicator
(AT vehicles).................................................... 3-20
Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-20
High beam indicator light ................................... 3-20
Cruise control indicator light.............................. 3-20
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 3-20
Driver’s control center differential auto indicator
light (WRX-STI) ................................................ 3-20
Driver’s control center differential indicator and
warning lights (WRX-STI) ................................. 3-21
Lights indicator light (WRX-STI) ......................... 3-21
REV indicator light (WRX-STI) ............................ 3-21
Clock .................................................................. 3-22
Instruments and controls
3
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Instruments and controls
Light control switch ........................................... 3-22
Headlights.......................................................... 3-22
High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-23
Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-23
Daytime running light system ............................. 3-23
Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-24
Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-25
Headlight beam leveler (U.S.-spec.
WRX-STI).......................................................... 3-25
Parking light switch ........................................... 3-25
Front fog light button (if equipped) .................. 3-26
Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-26
Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-27
Rear window wiper and washer switch –
Wagon............................................................. 3-28
Rear window defogger button .......................... 3-29
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped).............. 3-30
Intercooler water spray switch (WRX-STI) ....... 3-31
Mirrors ................................................................ 3-32
Inside mirror...................................................... 3-32
Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-33
Tilt steering wheel ............................................. 3-35
Horn.................................................................... 3-35
Black plate (113,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Ignition switch
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
“LOCK” while the vehicle is
being driven or towed because
that will lock the steering wheel,
preventing steering control. And
when the engine is turned off, it
takes a much greater effort than
usual to steer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moonroof or other controls or even
make the vehicle move.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it banged
against your knees or hands while
you are driving, it could turn the
ignition switch from the “ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby stopping the engine.
Also, if the key is attached to a
keyholder or to a large bunch of
other keys, centrifugal force may act
on it as the vehicle moves, resulting
in unwanted turning of the ignition
switch.
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, Acc, ON and START.
NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
not running.
. Using electrical accessories for a
long time with the ignition switch in the
"ON" or “Acc” position can cause the
battery to go dead.
. If the ignition switch will not move
from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
the ignition switch.
& LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed
in this position. The ignition switch will lock
the steering wheel when you remove the
key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
steering wheel slightly to the right and left
as you turn the key.
! Automatic transmission vehicles
Instruments and controls 3-3
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (114,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-4 Instruments and controls
The key can be turned from “Acc” to
“LOCK” only when the selector lever is in
the “P” position.
! Manual transmission vehicles
The key can be turned from “Acc” to
“LOCK” only when the key is pushed in
while turning it.
& Acc
In this position the electrical accessories
(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
& START
The engine is started in this position. The
starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to
the “ON” position.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
! For vehicle with immobilizer
If your registered key fails to start the
engine, pull out the key once (the security
indicator light will blink), and then insert
the key in the ignition switch and turn it to
the “START” position and again try to start
the engine.
NOTE
The engine may not start in the following cases:
. The key grip is touching another key
or a metallic key holder.
Black plate (115,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
. The key is near another key that
contains an immobilizer transponder.
. The key is near or touching another
transmitter.
& Key reminder chime
The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door opens and the key is in the
“LOCK” or “Acc” position. The chime stops
when the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
NOTE
The ignition switch light flashes when
the reminder chime sounds.
& Ignition switch light
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light comes on
when driver’s door is opened. The light
remains on for 5 seconds and goes out
after driver’s door is closed or if the key is
turned to the “ON” position.
& Key interlock release (AT vehicles only)
If the key can not be turned to the “LOCK”
position even when the selector lever is in
the “P” position:
1. Take out the screwdriver from the tool
bag.
2. Remove the cover under the steering
column using a Phillips screwdriver.
3. Turn the ignition key while pressing the
key interlock release lever.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU
dealer immediately to have the key interlock system repaired.
Instruments and controls 3-5
3
Black plate (116,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-6 Instruments and controls
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher is used to
warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
The hazard warning flasher works with the
ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
push the hazard warning button on the
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,
push the button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Meters and gauges (WRXSTI)
NOTE
Liquid-crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges in the
combination meter. You will find their
indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Combination meter illumination
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the various parts of the
combination meter are illuminated in the
following sequence:
1. Meter needles and gauge needles
light up.
2. Meter needles and gauge needles
each show MAX position.
3. Meter needles and gauge needles
each show MIN position, and REV indicator flashes.
4. Dials and indicators in meters and
gauges light up.
5. “STI” mark lights up.
6. Regular illumination (for driving) begins.
& Canceling sequential illumination of the combination
meter
With the ignition switch in the “ON”
position, it is possible to cancel sequential
illumination of the combination meter.
Press the trip knob while turning the REV
setting knob clockwise or counterclockwise. The buzzer will sound briefly, and
the outside temperature indicator will
show “ON” or “– –”.
ON : sequential illumination
– – : sequential illumination canceled
The setting toggles between “ON” and “–
–” each time the trip knob is pressed.
Return the REV setting knob to its original
position to complete the setting process.
The buzzer will sound briefly. A few
seconds later, the outside temperature
indicator will return to showing the outside
temperature.
NOTE
It is not possible to cancel sequential
illumination of the combination meter
while sequential illumination is actually
taking place. Cancel sequential illumination when regular illumination (for
driving) has begun.
Black plate (117,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
& Odometer/Trip meter
1) Trip meter
2) Odometer
This meter displays the odometer and two
trip meters when the ignition switch is in
the “LOCK”, “Acc” or “ON” position.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the
odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
possible to switch between the A trip
meter and B trip meter indications while
the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do
not press the trip knob within 10 seconds
of illumination of the odometer/trip meter,
the odometer/trip meter will go off.
! Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
! Double trip meter
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
To change the mode indication, briefly
push the knob.
Each press of the knob changes the
function alternately.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob
and keep the knob pushed for more than 2
seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
If the connection between the combination meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module
to protect the engine from overrevving. The engine will resume running normally after the engine speed
is reduced below the red zone.
Instruments and controls 3-7
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (118,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-8 Instruments and controls
& Fuel gauge
1) Low fuel warning light
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge shows “E”
even if the fuel tank contains fuel.
The gauge may move slightly during
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel
level movement in the tank.
NOTE
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge meter.
This indicates that the fuel filler door
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
! Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light comes on when
the tank is nearly empty [Approximately
2.3 US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal)].
It only operates when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
NOTE
This light does not go out unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US
gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light
comes on. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
& Temperature gauge
1) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in
Black plate (119,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with the
engine coolant at this temperature range
and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should
be avoided.
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
See the “In case of emergency” in
chapter 9.
& Outside temperature indicator
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Canada-spec. models
The outside temperature indicator shows
the outside temperature in a range from
−22 to 1228F (−30 to 508C).
The indicator can give a false reading
under any of the following conditions:
. When there is too much sun.
. During idling; while running at low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine
is restarted immediately following a shutdown.
. When the actual outside temperature
falls outside the specified indicator range.
REV indicator light and buzzer (WRX-STI)
The REV alarm system issues a warning
using the REV indicator light (and a
buzzer if additionally selected) when the
engine speed reaches a level previously
set using the REV setting knob.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the
outside temperature indicator will show
the engine speed that has already been
set.
Instruments and controls 3-9
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (120,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-10 Instruments and controls
NOTE
Even if the REV alarm system is not set,
the REV indicator light will come on
whenever the engine speed enters the
tachometer’s red zone.
& Setting the alarm-level engine speed
1. Turn the REV setting knob clockwise
or counterclockwise, then release it and
let it return to its initial position. The buzzer
will sound. The REV alarm system is now
ready to be set.
2. Turn the REV setting knob to select
the desired alarm-level engine speed.
At this time, the outside temperature
indicator will show the engine-speed
setting.
. Counterclockwise (−): Speed setting
changes downward by 100 rpm.
. Clockwise (+): Speed setting
changes upward by 100 rpm.
The speed setting will stop changing if
it reaches 0 rpm or the maximum
engine speed.

The alarm-level engine speed can be set
(in 100 rpm steps) within the range from
2,000 rpm to 7,000 rpm.
The indicator shows the setting as follows:
Speed (rpm) Indication
0 00
2,000 20
2,100 21
– –
7,000 70
Approximately 3 seconds after you stop
turning the knob, the REV alarm system
will automatically enter its next setting
mode (step 3 below), in which you can
activate or deactivate the buzzer.
3. Activate or deactivate the buzzer as
desired using the REV setting knob.
. Turn the knob clockwise (+) to
activate the buzzer. The indicator will
show “ON”, and the buzzer will sound
three times. With the buzzer activated,
engine-speed warnings are given by
both the REV indicator light and the
buzzer.
. Turn the knob counterclockwise (−)
to deactivate the buzzer. The indicator
will show “– –”, and the buzzer will not
sound. With the buzzer deactivated,
engine-speed warnings are given only
by the REV indicator light.
Approximately 3 seconds after you stop
turning the knob, the buzzer will sound
once to indicate the end of the setting
procedure. The indicator will return to
showing the outside temperature.
Also, the tachometer needle will return to
approximately “0”.
NOTE
. The REV alarm system does not
operate while settings are being entered.
. The speed-setting mode terminates
if 0 rpm is selected.
. The speed-setting mode is canceled
if the ignition switch is turned to OFF or
the vehicle starts moving before the
setting procedure is finished.
. Speed setting is impossible when
the vehicle is moving.
. The set engine speed may differ
Black plate (121,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
from the engine speed shown by the
tachometer. Use the engine speed
shown by the tachometer as a rough
guide.
& Deactivating the REV alarm
system
To deactivate the REV alarm system’s
REV indicator light and buzzer functions,
set the alarm-level engine speed to 0
(zero) rpm.
Meters and gauges (Except
WRX-STI)
NOTE
Liquid-crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges in the
combination meter. You will find their
indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
& Odometer/Trip meter
1) Trip meter
2) Odometer
This meter displays the odometer and two
trip meters.
! Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
! Double trip meter
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
To change the mode indication, briefly
push the knob.
Each press of the knob changes the
function alternately.
Instruments and controls 3-11
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (122,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-12 Instruments and controls
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob
and keep the knob pushed for more than 2
seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
If the connection between the combination meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module
to protect the engine from overrevving. The engine will resume running normally after the engine speed
is reduced below the red zone.
& Fuel gauge
1) Low fuel warning light
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
The gauge does not return to “E” even
though the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position.
The gauge may move slightly during
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel
level movement in the tank.
NOTE
You will see the “FUEL DOOR ”
sign in the fuel gauge.
This indicates that the fuel filler door
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
! Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light comes on when
the tank is nearly empty [approximately
2.3 US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal]. It only
operates when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
NOTE
This light does not go out unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal
Black plate (123,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US
gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).
CAUTION
(Turbo model only)
Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light
comes on. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
& Temperature gauge
1) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with the
engine coolant at this temperature range
and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should
be avoided.
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
See “In case of emergency” in
chapter 9.
& Outside temperature indicator
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Canada-spec. models
The outside temperature indicator shows
the outside temperature in a range from
−22 to 1228F (−30 to 508C).
The indicator can give a false reading
under any of the following conditions:
. When there is too much sun.
. During idling; while running at low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine
is restarted immediately following a shutdown.
. When the actual outside temperature
falls outside the specified indicator range.
Instruments and controls 3-13
3
Black plate (124,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-14 Instruments and controls
Warning and indicator lights
Several of the warning and indicator lights
come on momentarily and then go out
when the ignition switch is initially turned
to the “ON” position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. The
following lights come on:
. Seatbelt warning light
. SRS airbag system warning light
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
. CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp
. Charge warning light
. Oil pressure warning light
. AT OIL temperature warning light (AT
vehicles)
. ABS warning light
. Brake system warning light
. All-Wheel Drive warning light (AWD AT
vehicles)
. Cruise control indicator light
. Cruise control set indicator light
If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s seat, as
required by current safety standards.
There is a seatbelt warning light in the
combination meter.
If the driver has not yet fastened the
seatbelt when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning
light will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that
the seatbelt is unfastened. If the driver’s
seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also
sound simultaneously.
If the driver’s seatbelt is still not fastened 6
seconds later, the warning light will remain
lit for 15 seconds. If the driver’s seatbelt is
still not fastened even 15 seconds later
(21 seconds after turning ON the ignition
switch), the warning lights will alternate
between flashing and steady illumination
at 15-second intervals, and the chime will
sound while the warning light is flashing.
Alternate flashing and steady illumination
of the warning lights and sounding of the
chime will continue until the driver fastens
the seatbelt.
NOTE
. If the driver unfastens the seatbelt
after fastening, the seatbelt warning
device operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
. At speeds lower than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light will alternate
between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals. The
chime will not sound.
. At speeds higher than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light will alternate
between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals and
the chime will sound while the
warning light is flashing.
. It is possible to cancel the warning
operation that follows the 6-second
warning after turning ON the ignition
switch. When the ignition switch is
turned ON next time, however, the
complete sequence of the warning
operation resumes. For further details
about canceling the warning operation,
please contact your SUBARU dealer.
& SRS airbag system
warning light
When the ignition switch is turned to the
Black plate (125,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
“ON” position, the SRS airbag system
warning light will come on for approximately 6 seconds and go out. This shows
the SRS airbag and SRS side airbag (if
equipped) and seatbelt pretensioners are
in normal operation.
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in
the event of a collision, which may
increase the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warning light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
& Front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indicators
ON or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located next to the
clock in the center portion of the dashboard.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Following the system check, both indicators
extinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one
of the indicators illuminates depending on
the status of the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag determined by the Subaru
advanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain extinguished.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain extinguished while the OFF indicator will
illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indicators remain lit or extinguished simultaneously even after the system check
period, the system is faulty. Contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.
Instruments and controls 3-15
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (126,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-16 Instruments and controls
& CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE light comes
on while you are driving, have your
vehicle checked/repaired by your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Continued vehicle operation
without having the emission control
system checked and repaired as
necessary could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by
your vehicle’s warranty.
If this light comes on steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that there is a problem or potential
problem somewhere in the emission control system.
! If the light comes on steadily:
If the light comes on steadily while driving
or does not go out after the engine starts,
an emission control system malfunction
has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
This light also comes on when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
warning light turn off immediately. It may
take several driving trips. If the light does
not go out, take your vehicle to your
authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
! If the light is blinking:
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you should do the
following.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as
possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may
stop blinking and come on steadily after
several driving trips. You should have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Charge warning light
If this light comes on when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light comes on while driving or does
not go out after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains on, contact
your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Oil pressure warning
light
If this light comes on when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
If the light comes on while driving or does
not go out after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
at the proper level but the light remains on,
Black plate (127,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
oil pressure warning light on. This
may cause serious engine damage.
& AT OIL TEMPerature
warning light (AT vehicles)
The AT oil temperature warning light
comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position and goes out
after the engine has started.
If this light comes on when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the automatic
transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light comes on while driving, it is
unnecessary to stop the vehicle, but avoid
driving up steep grades or in stop and go
traffic.
! Automatic transmission control
system warning
If the light flashes after the engine starts, it
may indicate that the automatic transmission control system is not working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
& Rear differential oil
temperature warning
light (WRX-STI)
CAUTION
Reduce vehicle speed and park the
vehicle in a safe place as soon as
possible if the R.DIFF TEMP light
comes on. Continued driving with
this light on can damage the rear
differential and other parts of the
powertrain.
If this light comes on when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the rear
differential oil temperature is too hot.
At this time, the driver’s control center
differential will automatically cancel the
current torque-distribution ratio setting and
adopts its minimum ratio.
If the light comes on while driving, reduce
vehicle speed and stop the vehicle at the
nearest safe place.
Park the vehicle for several minutes. After
the light goes out, you can start driving.
If the light does not go out, contact the
nearest SUBARU dealer for service.
NOTE
. If the tire pressures are not correct
and/or the tires are not all the same
size and brand, the rear differential will
be heavily loaded when the vehicle is
driven, resulting in an abnormally high
oil temperature.
. The rear differential oil will deteriorate if its temperature increases enough for the rear differential oil temperature warning light to come on. It is
advisable to have the rear differential
oil replaced as soon as possible.
& ABS warning light
The ABS warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position and goes out after approximately
2 seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system
is working properly.
CAUTION
If the warning light behaves as
follows, the ABS system may not
work properly.
When the warning light is on, the
ABS function shuts down; however,
the conventional brake system continues to operate normally.
Instruments and controls 3-17
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (128,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-18 Instruments and controls
. The warning light does not come
on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
. The warning light comes on when
the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position, but it does not
go out even when the vehicle
speed exceeds approximately 8
mph (12 km/h).
. The warning light comes on during driving.
If any of these conditions occur,
have the ABS system repaired at
the first available opportunity by
your SUBARU dealer.
With a vehicle equipped with an EBD
system, the ABS warning light comes on
together with the brake system warning
light if the EBD system becomes faulty.
For further details of the EBD system fault
warning, refer to “Brake system warning
light”.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following, the ABS
system may be considered normal.
. The warning light comes on right
after the engine is started but goes out
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains on after
the engine has been started, but it goes
out when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
. The warning light comes on during
driving, but it goes out immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may come
on. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will go out.
& Brake system warning
light
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, we recommend that you have the brakes
inspected by a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
This light has the following three functions:
! Parking brake warning
The light comes on with the parking brake
applied while the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position. It goes out when the
parking brake is fully released.
! Brake fluid level warning
This light comes on when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level
of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should
come on while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
level is below the “MIN” mark in the
reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
The brake system warning light also
Black plate (129,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
EBD system. In that event, it comes on
together with the ABS warning light.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, apply the
parking brake and then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights go out, the EBD system
may be faulty. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
4. If both warning lights come on again
and stay illuminated after the engine has
been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest
SUBARU dealer and have the system
inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
& Door open warning
light
The door open warning light comes on if
any door or the rear gate is not fully
closed.
Always make sure this light is out before
you start to drive.
& All-Wheel Drive warning light (AWD AT
vehicles – if equipped)
The All-Wheel Drive warning light comes
on when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and goes out after the
engine has started.
This light comes on when All-Wheel Drive
is disengaged and the drive mechanism is
switched to Front Wheel Drive for maintenance or similar purposes (Non-turbo
vehicles).
It flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires
of differing diameters fitted on the wheels
or with an excessively low air pressure in
any of the tires.
CAUTION
Continuing to drive with the AWD
warning light flashing can damage
the powertrain. If the AWD warning
light starts to flash, promptly park in
a safe place and check whether the
tires have differing diameters and
whether any of the tires has an
excessively low inflation pressure.
& Intercooler water spray
warning light
(WRX-STI)
This light comes on when the water level
in the intercooler water spray tank falls to
the lower limit (approximately 0.4 US qt,
0.4 liter, 0.4 Imp qt).
Instruments and controls 3-19
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (130,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-20 Instruments and controls
& Selector lever position indicator (AT vehicles)
This indicator shows the position of the
selector lever.
& Turn signal indicator
lights
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to the “Replacing bulbs” section in
chapter 11.
& High beam indicator
light
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also comes on when
the headlight flasher is operated.
& Cruise control indicator light
The cruise control indicator light comes on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and goes out after approximately 3 seconds.
This light comes on when the “CRUISE”
main switch is pressed.
If you move the cruise control lever or
press the main switch button while turning
the ignition switch “ON”, the cruise control
function is deactivated and the “CRUISE”
indicator light flashes. To reactivate the
cruise control function, turn the ignition
switch back to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
position, and then turn it again to the
“ON” position.
& Cruise control set indicator light
The cruise control set indicator light
comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position and goes out
after approximately 3 seconds.
This light comes on when vehicle speed
has been set.
& Driver’s control center
differential auto indicator light (WRX-STI)
This light functions while the ignition
switch is “ON”. When on, it indicates that
the driver’s control center differential is set
to AUTO mode. It goes off when the
driver’s control center differential’s manual
mode switch is pressed. For details, refer
to Chapter 7, “Driver’s Control Center
Differential (DCCD) (WRX-STI)”.
Black plate (131,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Driver’s control center differential indicator and warning
lights (WRX-STI)
! Indicator lights
When illuminated, one of these indicator
lights indicates the initial limited slip
differential (LSD) torque currently selected
for the center differential.
! Warning light
The bottom indicator light “ ” flashes in the
event of failure of the driver’s control
center differential. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. For
details, refer to Chapter 7, “Driver’s Control Center Differential (DCCD) (WRXSTI)”.
& Lights indicator light
(WRX-STI)
This light comes on when the headlight
switch is placed in the “ ” or “ ”
position.
& REV indicator light
(WRX-STI)
This light comes on when the engine
speed reaches a level set by driver and
when the tachometer needle enters the
red zone.
Instruments and controls 3-21
3
Black plate (132,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-22 Instruments and controls
Clock
To set the hour, press the “H” button. To
set the minutes, press the “M” button. To
reset the minutes to “00” with a radio time
signal, push the “SET” button.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
set the time during driving, as an
accident from inadequate attention
to the road could result.
Light control switch
The light switch operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
WARNING
To prevent battery discharge resulting from accidentally leaving your
lights on when your vehicle is
parked, the light switch operates
only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position. In any other
position, the vehicle’s lights will be
out.
If you park your vehicle on a roadside at night, use the hazard warning flasher to alert the other drivers.
& Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the turn signal lever.
first position
Parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights, front side marker lights and
license plate light are on.
second position
Headlights, parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights, front side
marker lights, and license plate light are
on.
Black plate (133,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& High/low beam change (dimmer)
To change from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal lever forward. When
the headlights are on high beam, the high
beam indicator light “ ” on the instrument panel is also on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
back to the detent position.
& Headlight flasher
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the light switch is in the
“OFF” position.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “ ” on the
instrument panel also comes on.
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
& Daytime running light system
! WRX-STI
The low beam headlights, side marker
lights, tail lights, parking lights, and license
plate lights will automatically come on
when the engine has started, under the
following conditions:
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ ”
position.
. The automatic transmission selector
lever is set at other than the “P” position.
WARNING
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside.
! Except WRX-STI
The low beam headlights will automatically come on at reduced brightness when
the engine has started, under the following
conditions:
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ ”
position.
. The automatic transmission selector
lever is set at other than the “P” position.
Instruments and controls 3-23
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (134,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-24 Instruments and controls
WARNING
The tail lights, parking lights, and
side marker lights are not turned on
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside.
Turn signal lever
1) Right turn
2) Left turn
3) Lane change for right
4) Lane change for left
To activate the right turn signal, push the
turn signal lever up. To activate the left
turn signal, push the turn signal lever
down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically. If the lever does
not return after cornering, return the lever
to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The turn signal
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
Black plate (135,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Illumination brightness control
When the headlight switch is in the “ ”
or “ ” position, you can adjust brightness of the instrument panel illumination
for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
Headlight beam leveler (U.S.spec. WRX-STI)
The WRX-STI version has High-Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlights on the low
beam setting. The HID headlights generate more light than conventional halogen
headlights. Therefore a driver of an
oncoming vehicle may experience too
much glare when your headlight beam
height adjustment is high due to the
vehicle carrying heavy load.
The headlight beam leveler can be used
to adjust beam height to avoid such a
condition.
The higher the number the knob is turned
to, the lower the beam becomes.
Parking light switch
The parking light switch operates regardless of the ignition switch position.
By pushing the front end of this switch,
following lights will come on.
– Parking lights
– Front side marker lights
– Tail lights
– License plate lights
To turn off, push the rear end of the
parking light switch.
Avoid leaving these lights on for a long
time because that will run down the
battery.
Instruments and controls 3-25
3
Black plate (136,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-26 Instruments and controls
Front fog light button (if
equipped)
The front fog lights operate only when the
headlights are on low beam. Push the
front fog light button to turn the front fog
lights on.
Press the button again to turn them off.
The indicator light located on the button
will illuminate when the front fog lights are
on.
Wiper and washer
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the windshield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 10 seconds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield or rear window is
dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades and
cause the wiper motor to burn
out. Before operating the wiper
on a dry windshield or rear
window, always use the windshield washer.
. In freezing weather, be sure that
the wiper blades are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blades frozen to the
window glass could cause not
only the wiper blades to be
damaged but also the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper
blades are frozen to the window
glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear window
defogger before turning on the
wiper.
. If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, the
wiper motor could burn out even
if the wiper switch is turned off. If
this occurs, promptly stop the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and clean the window
glass to allow proper wiper operation.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Black plate (137,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
(See the “Windshield washer
fluid” section in chapter 11.)
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing temperatures, use non-freezing type wiper blades.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzene. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
NOTE
. The wiper operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc”
position.
. Clean your wiper blades and window glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Keep the washer button
depressed at least for 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window.
. Grease, wax, insects or other material on the windshield or the wiper
blade results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and wiper
blades with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades with new
ones. Refer to the “Replacement of
wiper blades” section (chapter 11) for
replacement instructions.
& Windshield wiper and washer
switches
! Windshield wipers
OFF: Park
: Intermittent
LO: Low speed
HI: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “OFF” position.
Instruments and controls 3-27
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (138,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-28 Instruments and controls
! Wiper intermittent time control
When the wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper.
The operating interval can be adjusted in
four steps.
Two click stop positions of the dial may
help you to aim at your desired interval.
! Mist (for a single wipe)
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the
lever toward you. The wipers operate until
you release the lever.
! Washer
To wash the windshield, push the washer
button at the end of the wiper control lever.
The washer fluid sprays until you release
the washer button. The wipers operate
while you push the button.
& Rear window wiper and
washer switch – Wagon
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
ON: Normal
OFF: Park
: Washer
! Rear wiper
The rear wiper offers intermittent operation only.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on
the end of the wiper control lever to the
“ON” position.
Black plate (139,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
To turn the wiper off, return the knob to the
“OFF” position.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob clockwise
to the “ ” position. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob counterclockwise to the “ ” position. The washer
fluid sprays and the wiper operates until
you release the knob.
Rear window defogger button
The rear window defogger operates only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The rear window defogger button is
located on the climate control panel.
To turn on the defogger, push the button.
To turn it off, push the button again.
The indicator light located on the button
lights up while the rear window defogger is
operating.
The defogger will automatically shut off
after approximately 15 minutes. If the
window clears before that time, push the
button to turn it off. It also turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging
is desired when you restart your vehicle,
you have to push the button to turn it on
again.
Manual climate control system
Automatic climate control system
NOTE
. If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside mirror defogger, the outside
mirror defogger operates while the rear
Instruments and controls 3-29
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (140,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-30 Instruments and controls
window defogger is operating.
. Turn on the rear window defogger if
the wiper is frozen to the glass.
CAUTION
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface
of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed
on the window.
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger continuously for any
longer than necessary.
Windshield wiper deicer (if
equipped)
The windshield wiper deicer operates only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
Before turning on the windshield wiper
deicer, remove any snow from the windshield. To turn on the windshield wiper
deicer, push the button. The indicator light
located on the button lights up while the
windshield wiper deicer is operating.
The windshield wiper deicer will automatically shut off after approximately 15
minutes. If the windshield wiper blades
have been deiced completely before that
time, push the button to turn it off. It also
turns off when the ignition switch is turned
to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position. If deicing
is not complete when you restart your
vehicle, you have to push the button to
turn the deicer on again.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside mirror defogger, the outside
mirror defogger operates while the
windshield wiper deicer is operating.
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
windshield wiper deicer continuously for any longer than necessary.
Black plate (141,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Intercooler water spray
switch (WRX-STI)
Pressing this switch causes water to be
sprayed into the intercooler. It can be used
to help maintain adequate intercooler
performance when the outside temperature is high.
Water is sprayed for approximately 2
seconds every time the switch is pressed
and then released.
NOTE
. The intercooler water spray warning
light comes on when the water level in
the tank has dropped to the lower limit.
If the warning light illuminates, refill the
tank with water. The tank is located on
the right-hand side of the trunk. For the
tank refilling method, refer to the
“Intercooler water spray (WRX-STI)”
section in chapter 11.
. In cold weather (when you do not
use the intercooler water spray), keep
the tank half-empty or below in case
the water freezes. A larger amount of
water could break the tank if it froze.
CAUTION
Do not press the switch when the
warning light is illuminated. If the
switch is kept pressed when the
tank is short of water, the water
pump motor could overheat.
Instruments and controls 3-31
3
Black plate (142,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-32 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Inside mirror
The inside mirror has a day and night
position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the
mirror toward you for the night position.
Push it away for the day position. The
night position reduces glare from headlights.
! Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if
equipped)
1) Left button
2) Auto dimming indicator
3) Photosensor
4) Right button
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass.
. By pressing and releasing the left
button, the automatic dimming function is
toggled on or off. When the automatic
dimming function is on, the auto dimming
indicator light (green) located to the right
of the button will illuminate.
. By pressing and releasing the right
button, the compass display is toggled on
or off. When the compass is on, an
illuminated compass reading will appear
in the lower part of the mirror.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the
transmission is shifted into reverse. This
is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. If the glare
from the headlights of vehicles behind you
strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it
and make the reflection surface of the
mirror dimmer to help prevent you from
being blinded. For this reason, use care
not to cover the sensors with stickers, or
other similar items. Periodically wipe the
sensors clean using a piece of dry soft
Black plate (143,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
cotton cloth or an applicator.
! Compass calibration
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all
nonessential electrical accessories (rear
window defogger, heater/air conditioning
system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all
doors are shut.
2. Drive to an open, level area away from
large metallic objects or structures and
make certain the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
3. Press and hold the left button for 3
seconds then release, and the compass
will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and
direction will be displayed.
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL”
disappears from the display (approximately two or three circles). The compass
is now calibrated.
5. Further calibration may be necessary
should outside. Influences cause the
mirror to read inaccurately. You will know
that this has occurred if your compass
begins to read in only limited directions.
Should you encounter this situation, return
to step one of the above procedure and
recalibrate the mirror.
! Compass zone adjustment
Compass calibration zones
1. The zone setting is factory preset to
Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration
zone” map shown above or one attached
to the end of this manual to verify that the
compass zone setting is correct for your
geographical location.
2. Press and hold the right button for 3
seconds then release, and the word
“ZONE” will briefly appear and then the
zone number will be displayed.
3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly
to cycle the display through all possible
zone settings. Stop cycling when the
correct zone setting for your location is
displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
& Outside mirrors
! Convex mirror (Passenger side)
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
the convex mirror to judge the
distance of vehicles behind you
when changing lanes. Use the inside
mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in
convex mirror.
Instruments and controls 3-33
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (144,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3-34 Instruments and controls
! Remote control mirror switch
1) Selection switch
2) Direction control switch
The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“Acc” position.
1. Press either end of the selection
switch, “L” for the left, “R” for the right.
2. Move the direction control switch in the
direction you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the selection switch to the
neutral position to prevent unintentional
operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.
! Outside mirror defogger (if
equipped)
Manual climate control system
Automatic climate control system
The outside mirror defogger shares the
button with rear window defogger.
The outside mirror defogger operates only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
To turn on the outside mirror defogger,
push the button. To turn it off, push the
button again. The indicator light located on
the button lights up while the outside
mirror defogger is operating.
The defogger will automatically shut off
after approximately 15 minutes. If the
mirror clears before that time, push the
button to turn it off. It also turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging
is desired when you restart your vehicle,
you have to push the button to turn it on
again.
NOTE
While the outside mirror defogger is
operating, the rear window defogger
also operates.
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the defogger continuously for any longer
than necessary.
Black plate (145,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Tilt steering wheel
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the
“Front seats” section (chapter 1).
2. Push the tilt lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt
position while driving. This may
cause loss of vehicle control and
result in personal injury.
Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Instruments and controls 3-35
3
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Ventilator.............................................................. 4-2
Air flow selection ................................................ 4-2
Center and side ventilators.................................. 4-3
Manual climate control system
(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-3
Control panel ...................................................... 4-3
Heater operation ................................................. 4-5
Air conditioner operation
(if equipped)...................................................... 4-7
Automatic climate control system
(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-8
Control panel ...................................................... 4-8
To use as full-automatic climate control
system.............................................................. 4-8
To use as semi-automatic climate control
system.............................................................. 4-8
Fan speed control dial......................................... 4-9
Temperature control dial...................................... 4-9
Air flow control dial ............................................. 4-9
Air inlet selection button.................................... 4-10
Air conditioner button........................................ 4-10
Temperature sensors ......................................... 4-11
Operating tips for heater and air
conditioner ...................................................... 4-11
Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 4-11
Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight ........................................................... 4-11
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit.............................................................. 4-12
Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................ 4-12
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-12
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-12
Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-12
Air filtration system........................................... 4-12
Replacing the air filter........................................ 4-13
Climate control
4
Black plate (148,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
4-2 Climate control
Ventilator
& Air flow selection
Black plate (149,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Center and side ventilators
! Center ventilators
Move the tab up and down or right and left
to adjust the flow direction.
! Side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Move the knob in any direction you prefer
to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the knob
counterclockwise.
To close the ventilator, turn the knob
clockwise.
Manual climate control system (if equipped)
& Control panel
1) Air inlet selection lever
2) Air conditioner button
3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
the “Rear window defogger button” section in chapter 3.)
4) Air flow control dial
5) Fan speed control dial
6) Temperature control dial
! Temperature control dial
This dial regulates the temperature of air
flow from the air outlets over a range from
the blue side (cool) to red side (warm).
Climate control 4-3
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (150,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
4-4 Climate control
! Fan speed control dial
The fan operates only when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. The
fan speed control dial is used to select 4
fan speeds.
! Air flow control dial
This dial has the following five positions:
: Air flows through the instrument panel
outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel
outlets and the foot outlets.
: Air flows through the foot outlets and
some through the windshield defroster
outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield
defroster outlets and foot outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield
defroster outlets.
NOTE
. You will find the notation “USE WITH
” on the air flow control dial plate.
This is intended to remind you to set
the air inlet selection lever in the “ ”
position when defogging the windshield.
Defogging with the air inlet selection
lever set in the “ ” position provides
better defogging performance than in
the “ ” position.
. When the dial is placed in the “ ”
or “ ” position, the air conditioner
compressor operates automatically regardless of the position of the air
conditioner button to defog the windshield quickly.
However the indicator on the air conditioner button will not come on.
Also, you cannot stop the air conditioner compressor by pressing the air
conditioner button.
! Air conditioner button (if equipped)
The air conditioner operates only when
the engine is running.
Push the air conditioner button while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner. The indicator light will come
on.
Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.
! Air inlet selection lever
(Recirculation): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Place the air inlet selection lever in the
“ ” position for fast cooling with the air
conditioner or when driving on a dusty
road.
(Outside air): Outside air is drawn into
the passenger compartment.
Place the air inlet selection lever in the
“ ” position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
is no longer dusty.
WARNING
Continued operation in the “ ”
position may fog up the windows.
Switch to the “ ” position as soon
as the outside dusty condition
clears.
Black plate (151,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Heater operation
! Defrosting or defogging the windshield
To direct warm air to the windshield and
front door windows:
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the
“ ” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial all
the way to the right.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
highest speed.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air
conditioner, when the “ ” or “ ” position
is selected, the air conditioner compressor
automatically operates regardless of the
position of the air conditioner button to
defog the windshield quickly.
However, the air conditioner indicator light
does not come on at this time.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right
and left air outlets. To stop warm air
flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding knob clockwise.
! Heating and defrosting
To direct warm air toward the floor and the
windshield:
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the
“ ” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
most comfortable level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired speed.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air
conditioner, when the “ ” or “ ” position
is selected, the air conditioner compressor
automatically operates regardless of the
position of the air conditioner button to
defog the windshield quickly.
However, the air conditioner indicator light
does not come on at this time.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right
and left air outlets. To stop warm air
flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding knob clockwise.
Climate control 4-5
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (152,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
4-6 Climate control
! Heating
To direct warm air toward the floor:
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the
“ ” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
most comfortable level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired speed.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right
and left air outlets. To stop warm air
flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding knob clockwise.
! Bi-level heating
This setting allows you to direct air of
different temperatures from the instrument
panel and foot outlets. The air from the
foot outlets is slightly warmer than from
the instrument panel outlets.
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the
“ ” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired temperature level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired speed.
Setting the temperature control dial fully
turned to the red area or blue area
decreases the temperature difference
between the air from the instrument panel
outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
! Ventilation
To force outside air through the instrument
panel outlets:
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the
“ ” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
position.
3. Set the temperature control dial all the
way left.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired speed.
When driving on a dusty road, set the air
inlet selection lever to the “ ” position.
Black plate (153,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
WARNING
Continued operation in the “ ”
position may fog up the windows.
Switch to the “ ” position as soon
as the outside dusty condition
clears.
& Air conditioner operation (if
equipped)
! Cooling or dehumidifying
For cooling and dehumidification of the
passenger compartment, performing the
following steps will allow air to flow
through the instrument panel outlets:
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the
“ ” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
position.
3. Set the air conditioner button to the
“ON” position.
4. Set the temperature control dial to the
blue side.
5. Set the fan speed control dial at the
desired speed.
! Defrosting or defogging
To direct warm air to the windshield and
front door windows:
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the
“ ” position.
2. Set the air outlet control dial to the
“ ” position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
red side.
4. Set the fan speed control dial at the
highest speed.
The air conditioner compressor automatically operates when the air flow control
dial set in the “ ” or “ ” position to
provide better defogging performance.
However, the air conditioner indicator light
does not come on at this time.
Climate control 4-7
4
Black plate (154,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
4-8 Climate control
Automatic climate control
system (if equipped)
Although this climate control system can
be used as a full-automatic climate control
system, it can also, if desired, be used as
a semi-automatic climate control system.
When it is used as a full-automatic climate
control system, the outlet air temperature,
fan speed, air flow distribution, air inlet
control, and air conditioner compressor
operation are all automatically controlled
to maintain a constant, comfortable temperature inside the vehicle.
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate control system when the engine is running.
. When the engine coolant is cold, the
blower does not run.
. In the “AUTO” mode, when the air
temperature in the passenger compartment is sufficiently cool, the air conditioner compressor does not operate.
For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold weather, press the “A/C”
button to operate the air conditioner
compressor.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
setting the temperature much lower
than the current outlet air temperature
turns on the air conditioner compressor automatically and the “A/C” indicator light on the control panel comes
on.
& Control panel
1) Air flow control dial
2) Fan speed control dial
3) Temperature control dial
4) Air conditioner button
5) Air inlet selection button
6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
the “Rear window defogger button” section in chapter 3.)
& To use as full-automatic climate control system
Place the temperature control dial in the
position for your desired temperature, then
set the other dials and buttons as described in the following. The system’s
functions will then switch to AUTO mode
and be controlled automatically.
. Air flow control dial: AUTO position
. Fan speed control dial: AUTO position
. Air inlet selection button: Press for at
least 1 second. (Indicator will flash twice.)
. Air conditioner button: Press for at least
1 second. (Indicator will flash twice.)
& To use as semi-automatic
climate control system
Each function can be individually set to
AUTO mode independently of the others.
Any function set to AUTO mode is controlled automatically. Any function not set
to AUTO mode can be manually adjusted
as desired.
The temperature can be set within a range
of 65 to 858F (20 to 308C).
Black plate (155,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Fan speed control dial
The fan operates only with the ignition
switch in the ON position. The fan speed
control dial is used to select the AUTO
(automatic control) mode or to select the
desired fan speed. The dial’s positions
and their functions are as follows:
OFF: The fan does not operate.
AUTO: The fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the air
temperature inside and outside the passenger compartment, the intensity of sunlight, and other factors. SUBARU recommends using the AUTO position.
Other positions: The fan speed can be
adjusted in 25 steps.
NOTE
With the fan speed control dial in the
AUTO position and the air flow control
dial in the “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” position,
the fan does not operate during engine
warm-up until the engine coolant temperature exceeds approx. 1228F (508C).
& Temperature control dial
This dial is used to set the desired interior
temperature. With the dial set to your
desired temperature, the system automatically adjusts the temperature of air
supplied from the outlets such that the
desired temperature is achieved and
maintained.
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,
the system gives maximum cooling performance. If the dial is turned fully clockwise, the system gives maximum heating
performance.
& Air flow control dial
This dial has the following six positions.
The outlets from which air is supplied in
each position are as follows:
AUTO: The air flow control is adjusted
automatically in accordance with the air
temperature inside and outside the passenger compartment, the intensity of sunlight, and other factors. SUBARU recommends using the AUTO position.
: Instrument panel outlets
: Instrument panel outlets and foot
outlets
: Foot outlets and windshield defroster
Climate control 4-9
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (156,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
4-10 Climate control
outlets (relatively little air from windshield
defroster outlets)
: Windshield defroster outlets and foot
outlets
: Windshield defroster outlets
NOTE
When the dial is placed in the “ ” or
“ ” position, the air conditioner compressor operates automatically to defog the windshield quickly. At the same
time, the air inlet selection is automatically set to “outside air” mode.
& Air inlet selection button
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air
is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the
air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
when driving on a dusty road. The
indicator light will come on.
OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air
is drawn into the passenger compartment.
Push the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
is no longer dusty. The indicator light will
go off.
AUTO: When the air inlet selection button
is pressed for at least one second, the
indicator flashes twice. The air inlet control
is then adjusted automatically in accordance with the air temperature inside and
outside the passenger compartment, the
intensity of sunlight, and other factors.
Pressing the air inlet selection button
cancels the “AUTO” mode. SUBARU
recommends using the AUTO position.
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON position may fog up the windows. Switch
to the OFF position as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
& Air conditioner button
The button’s positions and their functions
are as follows:
ON: The air conditioner operates while the
fan is running.
Push the button to select this position. The
indicator light will illuminate.
OFF: The air conditioner does not operate.
Push the button again to select this
position. The indicator light will go off.
AUTO: When the button is pressed for at
least one second, the indicator flashes
twice. The air conditioner compressor
operation is then adjusted automatically
in accordance with the air temperature
inside and outside the passenger compartment, the intensity of sunlight, and
Black plate (157,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
other factors. Pressing the button cancels
the “AUTO” mode. SUBARU recommends
using the AUTO position.
NOTE
The air conditioner’s compressor does
not operate with an outside temperature of 328F (08C) or lower.
& Temperature sensors
1) Interior air temperature sensor
2) Solar sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are not treated
properly and become damaged, the system may not be able to control the interior
temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
the sensors, observe the following precautions:
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows:
– Solar sensor: beside windshield defroster grille
– Interior air temperature sensor: beside
the fan speed control dial
– Outside temperature sensor: behind
front grille.
Operating tips for heater and
air conditioner
& Cleaning ventilation grille
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
& Efficient cooling after parking
in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
Climate control 4-11
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (158,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
4-12 Climate control
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of
the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
& Lubrication oil circulation in
the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
& Checking air conditioning
system before summer season
Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions and proper
operation of each spring. Have your
SUBARU dealer perform this check.
& Cooling and dehumidifying in
high humidity and low temperature weather conditions
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning
system.
& Air conditioner compressor
shut-off when engine is
heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the accelerator
is fully depressed such as during rapid
acceleration or when driving on a steep
upgrade.
& Refrigerant for your climate
control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the method of adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant is different from the method for
CFC12 (Freon). Consult your SUBARU
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
result of using the wrong refrigerant are
not covered under warranty.
Air filtration system
If your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
equipped with an air filtration system,
replace the filter element according to
the replacement schedule shown in the
following. This schedule should be followed to maintain the filter’s dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter should be replaced more
frequently. It is recommended that you
have your filter checked or replaced by
your SUBARU dealer. For replacement,
use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule:
Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000
km) whichever comes first
Black plate (159,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Replacing the air filter
1. Remove the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(2) Remove the nine screws and the
one clip securing the glove box.
(3) Disconnect the glove box light
connector.
2. Unhook the hooks of the air filter cover
and remove the cover.
3. Draw out the air filter element.
4. Replace the air filter element with new
one.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point down.
5. Reinstall the air filter cover.
6. Connect the connector, and reinstall
the glove box.
7. Close the glove box.
Climate control 4-13
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (160,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
4-14 Climate control
1) Service label
2) Caution label
8. LABEL installation
(1) Fill out the information on the
service label (small).
(2) Attach the service label to the
driver side door pillar and the caution
label to the driver side end of the
instrument panel.
CAUTION
Contact your dealer if the following
occurs, even if it is not yet time to
change the filter:
. Reduction of the air flow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster performance if not properly maintained.
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Antenna system .................................................. 5-2
Printed antenna................................................... 5-2
FM reception....................................................... 5-2
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-2
Audio set ............................................................. 5-3
Type A audio set ................................................. 5-3
Type B audio set ................................................. 5-3
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (Optional audio unit –
if equipped)....................................................... 5-3
Type A audio set (if equipped) ........................... 5-4
Radio operation................................................... 5-4
Compact disc player operation............................. 5-7
CD changer control (if optional in-dash CD
changer is connected) ....................................... 5-9
Type B audio set (if equipped).......................... 5-11
Radio operation ................................................. 5-11
Built-in CD changer control ................................ 5-15
Auxiliary unit operation...................................... 5-20
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped)......... 5-23
Loading and unloading compact discs ............... 5-23
Precautions to observe when handling a
compact disc................................................... 5-25
Audio
5
Black plate (164,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-2 Audio
Antenna system
& Printed antenna
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of
the window on which the antenna is
printed. Doing so may damage the
antenna printed on the window.
! Sedan
The antenna is printed on the inner
surface of the rear window glass.
! Wagon and OUTBACK SPORT
The antenna is printed on the inner
surface of the rear window glass.
& FM reception
Although FM is normally static free,
reception can be affected by the surrounding area, atmospheric conditions, station
strength and transmitter distance. Buildings or other obstructions may cause
momentary static, flutter or station interference. If reception continues to be
unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing a citizen band radio or
other transmitting device in your vehicle.
Such devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not
suited for the vehicle.
Black plate (165,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one
of the following audio sets. See the pages
indicated in this section for operating
details.
& Type A audio set
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-4
. Compact disc player operation: refer to
page 5-7
. CD changer control: refer to page 5-9
& Type B audio set
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-11
. Built-in CD changer control: refer to
page 5-15
. Auxiliary unit operation: refer to page 520
& In-dash 6 CD auto changer
(Optional audio unit – if
equipped)
. Loading and unloading compact discs:
refer to page 5-23
Audio 5-3
5
Black plate (166,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-4 Audio
Type A audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” position.
& Radio operation
(1) Scan button
(2) Power switch, Volume control, Bass/Treble control and Fader/Balance control dial
(3) Tuning buttons
(4) FM/AM selection button
(5) Preset buttons
(6) Tone/Balance button
! Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/balance control (ON/VOL)
The dial (2) is used for both power (ON/
OFF) and volume control. The radio is
turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial
and the volume is controlled by turning the
dial.
! Tone and balance control
The volume control dial (2) normally
functions as volume control. This dial
becomes a control for Treble, Bass, Fader
or Balance when you select the appropriate audio mode.
Choose desired volume level for each
mode by turning the volume control dial.
The control function returns to volume
control mode after approximately 5 seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief
press of the “T/B” button (6) changes
control modes in the following sequence
starting from volume control mode. (When
the radio is first turned on, the control
mode is in the volume control.)
Black plate (167,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Display Control mode
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
BAS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound
TRE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound
BAL Balance control To increase left speaker volume and decrease right speaker volume
To increase right speaker volume and
decrease left speaker volume
FAD Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and
decrease front speaker volume
To increase front speaker volume and
decrease rear speaker volume
VOL Volume control For less volume For more volume
! FM/AM selection button (FM/AM)
Push the “FM/AM” button (4) when the
radio is off to turn on the radio.
Push the “FM/AM” button when the radio
is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.
Each time this button is pressed, the band
will change in the following order:
The display indicates which one is currently selected.
! Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on
when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
Audio 5-5
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (168,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-6 Audio
! Manual tuning (TUNE)
Push the “ ” side of the tuning button (3)
to increase the tuning frequency and
press the “ ” side of the button to
decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the
frequency changes 10 kHz in the AM
waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM waveband.
Constant pressure on the button causes a
continuous change in the frequency.
! Automatic tuning (SCAN)
Press the “SCAN” button (1) to change the
radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the
radio scans through the radio band until a
station is found. The radio will stop at the
station for 5 seconds while displaying the
frequency, after which scanning will continue until the entire band has been
scanned from the low end to the high
end. Press the “SCAN” button again to
cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any
displayed frequency.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for
automatic tuning, stations are scanned in
the direction of low frequencies to high
frequencies only.
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to
tall buildings and hills.
! Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a preset button
(5) allows you to select that station in a
single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and
FM2 stations each may be preset.
! How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM/AM” button (4) to select
AM, FM1 or FM2 reception.
2. Press the “SCAN” button (1) or tune
the radio manually until the desired station
frequency is displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons (5) for
at least 2 seconds to store the frequency.
The frequency of the station will flash once
on the display at this time. If the button is
pressed for less than 2 seconds, the
preceding selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
. If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this
occurs, it is necessary to reset the
preset buttons.
. If a cell phone is placed near the
radio, it may cause the radio to emit
noise when it receives calls. This noise
does not indicate a radio fault.
Black plate (169,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Compact disc player operation
(7) Eject button
(8) Disc slot
(9) Disc button
(10) Repeat/Random button
(11) Track selection buttons
! To play back a compact disc
! When CD is not in the player
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole
while gripping the edge of the disc, then
insert it into the slot (with the label side up)
and the player will automatically pull the
disc into position.
An 8 cm/3 inch CD may also be used
without any adapter.
NOTE
. Make sure to always insert a disc
with the label side up.
. After the last track finishes, the
player will automatically return to track
1 (the first track on the disc).
! When CD is in the player
Press the “DISC” button (9). The display
will show “CD” and the player will start
playback.
NOTE
After the last track finishes, playback
will automatically return to track 1 (the
first track on the disc).
Audio 5-7
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (170,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-8 Audio
! To select a track from its beginning
! Forward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button
(11) to skip to the beginning of the next
track. Each time this side of the button is
pressed, the indicated track number will
increase.
! Backward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button
(11) to skip to the beginning of the current
track. Each time this side of the button is
pressed, the indicated track number will
decrease.
! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
! Fast-forwarding
Press the “ ” side of the button (11)
continuously to fast-forward the disc.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
! Fast-reversing
Press the “ ” side of the button (11)
continuously to fast-reverse the disc.
Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
! Repeat playback
Press the “RPT” button (10) while a track
is playing to play the song repeatedly. The
“RPT” indicator will come on and the song
will be played continuously. To cancel the
repeat mode, press the button again.
Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and
normal playback mode is restored.
! Random playback
Press the “RDM” button (10) and hold it in
more than 2 seconds while a disc is being
played back to play all songs on the disc in
a random order. The “RDM” indicator will
come on and all songs on the disc will be
played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the
button again. Then the “RDM” indicator
goes out, and normal playback mode is
restored.
! To eject a disc from the player
When a disc is being played back or when
a disc is in the player, press the eject
button “ ” (7). The disc will be ejected.
The disc may be removed even when the
ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position.
NOTE
Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
Black plate (171,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& CD changer control (if optional in-dash CD changer is connected)
An optional CD changer can be connected to this audio unit. Consult the instructions that
accompany the CD changer for operating the CD changer itself (e.g., how to load or
unload CDs). See your SUBARU dealer for more information.
(12) Track selection buttons
(13) Disc button
(14) Repeat/Random button
(15) Disc selection buttons
! To start playback
When the “DISC” button (13) is pressed,
the CD changer will start playback. The
display shows the current disc number,
track number and the elapsed time during
playback.
NOTE
. If a disc is in the player, the “DISC”
button is used to change from CD
player operation to CD changer operation. Each time the “DISC” button is
pressed, the operating mode will
change alternately.
. At the end of the disc, the player
automatically continues with the next
disc.
. After playback on the last disc
finishes, playback will automatically
return to the first disc.
. If you have loaded fewer than 6
discs, any missing disc is automatically skipped.
Audio 5-9
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (172,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-10 Audio
! Selection of a desired disc
You can select a desired disc from among
the discs contained in the CD changer
only by pressing the corresponding number on one of the disc selection buttons
(15). If you are to listen to the 5th disc in
the CD changer, press the “5” button of the
disc selection buttons (15). All other discs
in the CD changer can also be selected in
a similar way.
NOTE
. No disc change takes place if the
button corresponding to the storage
tray in which no disc is loaded is
pressed.
. If the disc selection button (15)
corresponding to the disc now in playback is pressed again, the disc will be
replayed from its beginning.
! To select a song from its beginning
! Forward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button
(12) to skip to the beginning of the next
track. Each time this side of the button is
pressed, the indicated track number will
increase.
! Backward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button
(12) to skip to the beginning of the current
track. Each time this side of the button is
pressed, the indicated track number will
decrease.
! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
! Fast-forwarding
Press the “ ” side of the button (12)
continuously to fast-forward the disc.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
If you continue fast-forwarding to the end
of the disc, the CD changer will automatically stop fast-forwarding and start
playback beginning with the first track on
the current disc.
! Fast-reversing
Press the “ ” side of the button (12)
continuously to fast-reverse the disc.
Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
If you continue fast-reverse to the beginning of the disc, the CD changer will
automatically stop fast-reverse and start
playback beginning with the first track on
the current disc.
! Repeat playback
Use this to play a certain track repeatedly.
During playback, press the “RPT” button
(14) and release it in less than 2 seconds.
The “RPT” indicator will come on and the
song will be played continuously. To
cancel the repeat mode, press the button
again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out,
and normal playback mode is restored.
! Random playback
Use this to play the tracks on the disc in
random order. During playback, press the
“RDM” button (14) and hold it in for more
than 2 seconds. The “RDM” indicator will
come on and all songs on the disc will be
played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the
button again. Then the “RDM” indicator
goes out, and normal playback mode is
restored.
Black plate (173,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Type B audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” position.
& Radio operation
(1) Power switch, Volume, Brightness control dial
(2) FM/AM selection button
(3) Seek button
(4) Scan button
(5) Sound/Tune control dial
(6) Preset buttons
! Power switch and volume/brightness control (POWER/VOL/
BRIGHT)
The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/
OFF) and volume control. The radio is
turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial,
and the volume is controlled by turning the
dial.
! Sound control and tune/folder select/channel control (SOUND/TUNE/
FOLDER/CH)
The dial (5) is used for selecting the sound
control mode with each brief press of the
dial, and turn it to adjust each level. It is
also used for tuning the radio/folder
selection (only when playing MP3 or
WMA)/channel selection (satellite radio*)
when the “FM/AM”, “CD/AUX” and “SAT”
are selected.
(*: Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a
tuner, antenna and a service contract. For
details, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.)
Audio 5-11
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (174,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-12 Audio
Display Control mode
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
BASS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound
MIDDLE Midrange control For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
TREBLE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound
FADER Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and
decrease front speaker volume
To increase front speaker volume and
decrease rear speaker volume
BALANCE Balance control To increase left speaker volume and decrease right speaker volume
To increase right speaker volume and
decrease left speaker volume
VOLUME Volume control For less volume For more volume
! Sound control
The dial (5) controls the Bass, Midrange,
Treble, Balance and Fader when you
select the appropriate sound control
mode. Choose the desired setting for
each mode by depressing the “SOUND”
control dial (5). The control function
returns to last mode after approximately
5 seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief
press of the “SOUND” control dial (5)
changes control modes in the following
sequence starting from bass control
mode.
Black plate (175,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
! Display illumination dimness cancelation (BRIGHT)
The brightness of the radio display dims
when the light switch is in the “ ” or
“ ” position. If this makes the display
difficult to read, press the volume dial for
more than 2 seconds to return the display
to original brightness. Subsequently
pressing the volume dial again for more
than 2 seconds or if you can safely do so,
turning the light switch to the OFF position
and back to the “ ” or “ ” position
makes the radio display dim again.
! FM/AM selection button (FM/AM)
Push the “FM/AM” button (2) when the
radio is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM
reception. Each time this button is
pressed, the band will change in the
following order:
The display indicates which one is currently selected.
! Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on
when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
! Manual tuning (TUNE)
Turn the tuning dial (5) clockwise to
increase the tuning frequency and turn
the dial counterclockwise to decrease it.
Each click the dial is turned, the frequency
changes 10 kHz in the AM waveband and
0.2 MHz in the FM waveband.
! Seek tuning
When the “ ” side of the “SEEK/TRACK/
CAT” button (3) is depressed, the radio will
begin to automatically seek up for receivable frequencies and will stop at the first
one found. For the “ ” side, the radio will
begin to automatically seek down. This
function may not be available, however,
when radio signals are weak. In such a
situation, perform manual tuning to select
the desired station.
! Automatic tuning (SCAN)
Press the “SCAN” button (4) to change the
radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the
radio scans through the radio band until a
station is found. The radio will stop at a
receivable station for 5 seconds while
displaying the frequency by blinking, after
which scanning will continue until the
entire band has been scanned from the
low end to the high end. Press the “SCAN”
button again to cancel the SCAN mode
and to stop on any displayed frequency.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for
automatic tuning, stations are scanned in
the direction of low frequencies to high
frequencies only. Automatic tuning may
not function properly if the station reception is weakened by distance from the
station or proximity to tall buildings and
hills.
! Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a preset button
(6) allows you to select that station in a
single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and
FM2 stations each may be preset.
! How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM/AM” button (2) to select
AM, FM1 or FM2 reception.
2. Press the “SCAN” button (4) or tune
the radio manually until the desired station
frequency is displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons (6) for
at least 2 seconds to store the frequency.
The frequency of the station will flash once
on the display at this time.
NOTE
. If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this
occurs, it is necessary to reset the
Audio 5-13
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (176,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-14 Audio
preset buttons.
. If a cell phone is placed near the
radio, it may cause the radio to emit
noise when the phone receives calls.
This noise does not indicate a problem
with the radio.
Black plate (177,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Built-in CD changer control (7) CD button
(8) Eject button
(9) Disc slot
(10) Track selection buttons
(11) Repeat/Random button
(12) Disc number indicator
(13) Load button
(14) Folder selection dial
(15) Disc selection buttons
(16) Display button
NOTE
. Make sure to always insert a disc
with the label side up.
. If a disc is inserted during a radio
broadcast, the disc will interrupt the
broadcast.
. The player is designed to be able to
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
but it may not be able to play certain
ones.
. 8 cm/3 inch CDs are not supported,
and if inserted, they will be immediately
ejected.
Audio 5-15
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (178,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-16 Audio
! How to insert a CD(s)
! Inserting a CD
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (13). If
the magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator associated with the
idle position will blink. If no indicator
blinks, it means that there is no idle
position in the magazine.
2. When “IN” is displayed, insert the disc.
Once you have inserted the disc, the disc
number indicator will stop blinking. The
disc will be then automatically drawn in,
and the player will begin to play back the
first track of the disc.
. To insert more discs in succession,
repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will
be loaded with discs in the ascending
order of position number. If you do not
insert any disc within 15 seconds after you
have pressed the “LOAD” button and “IN”
is displayed, the player will begin to play
back the first track of the last disc you
have inserted.
. While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press the “FM/AM” button (2), the
player will enter the standby mode. Press
the “CD/AUX” button (7) to start playback.
! Inserting a disc in a desired position
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (13). If
the magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator (12) associated with
the idle position will blink.
2. Press the disc selection button (15) at
the position where you want to insert a
disc. The associated disc number indicator will blink.
3. If you insert a disc during the 15second period while “IN” is displayed, the
disc will be automatically drawn in, and the
player will start playback of the disc,
beginning with the first track.
. To insert more discs in succession,
repeat Steps 1 and 3.
. While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press the “FM/AM” button (2), the
player will enter standby mode. Press the
“CD/AUX” button (7) to start playback.
! Loading all the magazine (Full disc
loading mode)
1. If you continue to press the “LOAD”
button (13) for more than 2 seconds, the
player will enter the full disc loading mode.
2. The disc number indicator (12) associated with the idle position will blink. The
magazine will be loaded with discs in the
ascending order of position number.
3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next disc number indicator (12)
will blink. Then repeat Step 2.
4. When the magazine is filled with discs
by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will
start playback of the discs, beginning with
the one inserted first. If you fail to insert
any disc during each 15 seconds interval,
the full disc loading mode will be canceled, and the player will start playback of
the disc inserted first.
! How to play back a CD or make a
pause
! When there is no CD inserted:
Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a
CD(s)”.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start
playback of the CD, beginning with the
first track.
! When there are CDs loaded:
Depress the “CD/AUX” button to turn on
the CD (when the last mode of the player
is CD) and press a desired one of the disc
selection buttons (15). The player will then
start playback of the selected CD, beginning with the first track.
Black plate (179,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
! To select a track from its beginning
! Forward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button
(10) to skip to the beginning of the next
track. Each time the button is pressed, the
indicated track number will increase.
! Backward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button
(10) to skip to the beginning of the current
track. Each time the button is pressed, the
indicated track number will decrease.
! To select a folder (for MP3/WMA
audio)
Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial (14) to
select the folder.
! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
! Fast-forwarding
Press the “ ” side of the button (10)
continuously to fast-forward the disc.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
! Fast-reversing
Press the “ ” side of the button (10)
continuously to fast-reverse the disc.
Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
! Repeat playback
Depress the “RPT/RDM” button (11) while
a song is playing to play the song
repeatedly. Each time this button is
pressed, the repeat play mode will change
in the following order:
The “RPT” indicator will come on and the
song will be played continuously. When
the repeat OFF is selected, the “RPT”
indicator goes out and normal playback
mode is restored.
. The repeat play mode will be canceled if you perform any of the following steps:
. Press the “RPT/RDM” button to
select the repeat OFF.
. Press the eject button.
. Press the “LOAD” button.
. Select the radio mode.
. Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial
(for MP3/WMA audio).
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
! Random playback
Press the “RPT/RDM” button (11) for more
than 2 seconds while a disc is being
played back to play all songs on the disc in
a random order.
The “RDM” indicator will come on and all
songs on the disc will be played in a
random order. When the random OFF is
selected, the “RDM” indicator goes out
and normal playback mode is restored.
. The random play mode will be
canceled if you perform any of the
following steps:
. Press the “RPT/RDM” button to
select the random OFF.
. Press the eject button.
. Press the “LOAD” button.
. Select the radio mode.
. Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial
(for MP3/WMA audio).
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
! How to unload CDs from the player
! Ejecting a CD from the player
Of the discs loaded, you can select and
remove only one disc.
1. Press the disc selection button (15) of
the disc whose disc number indicator (12)
is ON.
2. Press the eject button (8). Then the
Audio 5-17
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (180,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-18 Audio
disc number indicator associated with the
disc you have selected will blink, and the
disc will be ejected. To remove more discs
in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2. If you
press the eject button after turning OFF
the ignition switch, only one disc will be
ejected.
! Ejecting all discs from the player (All
disc ejection mode)
1. If you continue to press the eject
button (8) for more than 2 seconds, the
player will enter the all disc ejection mode.
2. Remove the disc that has been
ejected, the display indicates “CD ALL
EJECT” (when the ignition switch is in the
“Acc” or “ON” position) and disc indicator
will blink. The other discs loaded will then
be ejected one after another. If you do not
remove the ejected disc within 15 seconds, the “All disc ejection mode” will be
canceled.
NOTE
Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to insert two or more
discs into the slot at a time. Doing
so can cause mechanical damage to
the CD changer.
! Title display selection
If you briefly press the “DISP” button (16)
during playback, the indication will change
to the next one in the following sequence.
. For MP3/WMA:
. For Satellite radio:
The display mode that you selected will
not be changed until you select the display
mode again.
When you depress the “DISP” button for
more than 2 seconds, the title will be
scrolled so you can see all of it. You will
see 12 characters at a time.
. The page scroll mode will be canceled if you perform any of the following steps:
. When you do not operate any button
within 10 seconds.
. Press any button to select another
play mode.
. Press the eject button.
. Press the disc selection button.
. Select the radio mode.
. Press the “ ” or “ ” button.
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
NOTE
When the disc has no title, the display
indicates “NO TITLE”.
! When the following messages are
displayed
If one of the following messages is
displayed while operating the CD player,
determine the cause based on the following information. If you cannot clear those
messages, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.
! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed
This message means that there is a
mechanical error. Depress the eject button
to unload the disc. Check the disc for
damage or deformation, and also check
that the correct disc is inserted. Do not try
to unload the disc forcibly. 8 cm/3 inch
CDs are not supported, and if inserted,
they will be immediately ejected and this
Black plate (181,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
error message will be displayed. If the disc
cannot be unloaded or the error message
remains displayed, please contact your
SUBARU dealer.
! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed
Press the eject button to unload the discs.
Check that the disc is not damaged or
scratched, and also check that the disc is
inserted correctly. Some CD-RW discs
may be causing this error message to
appear. Check that the disc type (i.e., 8
cm/3 inch CDs are not supported) and
data format are correct. This player can
only play MP3 and WMA data formats. If
the disc cannot be unloaded or the error
message remains displayed, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
Audio 5-19
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (182,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-20 Audio
& Auxiliary unit operation (17) AUX button
(18) Category button
(19) Scan button
(20) Satellite radio* button
(21) Category selection button
(22) Preset buttons
(23) Channel selection dial
(*: Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a
tuner, antenna and a service contract. For
details, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.)
“Satellite Radio mode” and “AUX mode”
are available as well as the CD changer
mode when the unit is in the Auxiliary unit
mode.
NOTE
. For use of the In-dash CD changer,
refer to the section of “In-dash 6 CD
auto changer” in this chapter.
. Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a tuner, antenna and a service
contract. For details, please contact
your SUBARU dealer.
. The “AUX mode” can be used when
the appropriate device is connected to
the AUX terminal.
. The output sound of the portable
audio player is not loud, and the sound
via the vehicle’s speakers that are
connected to the vehicle audio set is
very quiet. If you turn up the volume of
Black plate (183,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
the audio set, the volume becomes
louder. However, when you change
the audio to the radio mode or to a
CD player, the sound becomes a lot
louder. Remember to turn down the
volume when you change between
them.
! AUX terminal (if equipped)
The AUX terminal is located behind the lid
under the climate controls. Push gently on
the lid to open it.
! Satellite Radio mode
Press the “SAT” button (20) to select the
“Satellite radio mode” (when the SR-BB is
connected).
NOTE
Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a
tuner, antenna and a service contract.
For details, please contact your
SUBARU dealer.
or Visit Sirius Satellite Radio at sirius.com
or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474) for
more information. Sirius, the Sirius
dog logo, channel names and logos
are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite
Radio Inc.
! Satellite radio reception
Satellite radio signals are best received in
areas with a clear view of the open sky. In
areas where there are tall buildings, trees,
tunnels or other structures that may
obstruct the signal of the satellites, there
may be signal interruptions. Other circumstances that may result in signal loss
include driving near a wall, steep cliff or
hill, or driving on the lower level of a multitiered road or inside a parking garage.
To help reduce this condition, satellite
radio providers have installed groundbased repeaters in heavily populated
areas. However, you may still experience
reception problems in some areas.
Audio 5-21
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (184,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-22 Audio
! Displaying Sirius ID of tuner
When you activate Sirius, you should
have your Sirius tuner ID ready because
each tuner is identified by its unique Sirius
tuner ID.
The Sirius ID will be needed when you
activate Sirius and receive Sirius customer support.
The Sirius ID can be found on the audio
display by tuning the channel to “0”.
Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial (23) to
select the satellite radio channel.
! Channel selection
Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial (23) to
select the radio channel. Turn the tuning
dial clockwise to change the channel
upward and turn the dial counterclockwise
to change the channel downward with
each click of the dial.
! Category selection
Press the “SEEK/TRACK/CAT” button
(18) to select the category of radio
channel. Press the “ ” side of the button
(18) to change the category upward and
the “ ” side of the button to downward
with each press of the button.
! Channel preset
Presetting a channel with a preset button
(22) allows you to select that station in a
single operation. Up to six SR1, SR2 and
SR3 channels each may be preset.
Press one of the preset buttons for at
least 2 seconds to store the channel. The
number of the channel will flash once on
the display, and the unit produces a beep
sound at this time.
! Channel scan
Press the “SCAN” button (19) to change
the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode,
the radio scans through the channel until a
station is found. The radio will stop at the
station for 5 seconds while displaying the
channel number, after which scanning will
continue until the entire channel has been
scanned from the low end to the high end.
Press the “SCAN” button (19) again to
cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any
displayed station.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for
automatic tuning, stations are only
scanned in an upward direction.
! Category mode
Press the “CAT” button (21) for at least 2
seconds to turn the category mode on. In
this mode, the radio operations (channel
selection, channel scan) are performed
only in the selected category. To cancel
the category mode, press the “CAT” button
(21) for at least 2 seconds again.
! Band selection
Push the “SAT” button (20) when the radio
is on to select SR1, SR2 or SR3 reception.
Each time this button is pressed, the band
will change in the following order:
! AUX mode
Press the “CD/AUX” button (17) to select
the “AUX mode” (when the AUX unit is
connected to the AUX terminal).
Black plate (185,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped)
& Loading and unloading compact discs
(1) Disc slot
(2) Disc indicators (disc No. 1 to 6)
(3) Disc selection buttons (disc No. 1 to 6)
(4) Eject button
(5) Disc slot indicator
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to insert two or
more discs into the slot at a time.
Doing so can cause mechanical
damage to the CD changer.
. Use only music CDs identified by
a mark.
. Do not use CDs listed in the
following which could cause damage to the CD player.
. 3 inch (8 cm) compact disc
. Any disc with a peel-off or seal
on it
. Any disc with scratches and/
or dust
. Bent disc
. Cleaning disc
. CD accessory (e.g., 3 inch (8
cm) disc adapter)
. Do not insert or remove any disc
when the automatic transmission
selector lever is in the park
position; the selector lever in that
position can interfere with disc
insertion or removal, causing
scratches on the disc surface
(for AT vehicles).
Audio 5-23
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (186,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-24 Audio
! To insert a disc
1. Press one of the disc selection buttons
(3) (numbered from 1 to 6) for which the
disc indicator light (2) is off.
The disc indicator lights are located
directly above the corresponding disc
selection buttons.
2. The indicator will begin blinking. The
blinking will last for 15 seconds.
During this period, insert a desired disc,
and the disc will begin to play. (If any disc
is not inserted during this period, the disc
slot (1) door will close. Repeat Step 1.)
Be sure to hold a disc with the label side
(the side where titles are printed) up.
3. To insert another disc, repeat Steps 1
and 2 choosing a different disc selection
button.
! To insert six discs at a time
1. Press and hold the disc selection
button (3) number 1 until all disc indicators
begin blinking (approximately 1.5 seconds).
2. The indicators will blink for 15 seconds. During this period, insert six discs.
3. When all discs are loaded, the first
disc will begin to play. (If no disc is
inserted within this 15 seconds, the entire
disc load sequence will be canceled.)
! To remove a disc
1. Press the desired disc selection button
(3) (numbered from 1 to 6) for which the
disc indicator light is on.
2. Press the eject button “ ” (4). The
selected disc will be ejected and the
indicator light will begin blinking.
3. To remove another disc, repeat Steps
1 and 2 choosing a different disc selection
button.
(To remove discs when the ignition switch
is in the “LOCK” position, press the eject
button “ ”, and the first disc will be
ejected. Press the eject button “ ” again,
and the next disc will be ejected and so
on. At this time, the disc selection buttons
are disabled.)
! To remove all discs at one time
1. Press and hold the eject button “ ” (4)
until all disc indicators begin blinking
(approximately 1.5 seconds), and the first
disc will be ejected.
2. When the disc is removed, the next
one will be ejected, and so on.
! To replace a playing disc with
another
Simply press the desired one of disc
selection buttons (3) (numbered from 1
to 6) or press the disc selection button on
the radio unit to select the desired disc,
and the disc will begin to play.
! Disc indicators
Lit: when the corresponding storage tray is
occupied by a disc.
Blinking: Disc player is either in loading,
eject or changing mode.
OFF: No disc is loaded or the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” position.
! Open/Closed disc slot indicator
When the disc slot is open, the disc
indicators on both sides of the slot
illuminate.
! Function control
Refer to CD changer control operating
instructions described in the “Type A audio
set” or “Type B audio set” section.
Black plate (187,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Precautions to observe when
handling a compact disc
Use only compact discs (CDs) that have
the mark shown in the following illustration.
You may also use compact discs (CD-Rs
and CD-RWs) that have the following
marks, but you may not use some discs
if they were produced using writing methods not compatible with your vehicle’s
audio system.
. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD
player. If you insert a DualDisc into the
player, the disc may not come out again,
possibly causing the player to malfunction.
. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can
form inside the CD player, preventing
normal operation. If this happens, eject
the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
. Skipping may occur when the CD
player is subjected to severe vibration
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
on a rough surface).
. To remove a disc from the case, press
the center of the case and hold both
edges of the disc. If the disc surface is
touched directly, contamination could
cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the
disc surface.
. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If
there are deposits, wipe the disc surface
from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,
thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use
any disc that has a non-standard shape
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never
keep it either in places exposed to direct
sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles
parked in the sun or on hot days.
Audio 5-25
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (188,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
5-26 Audio
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2
Dome light .......................................................... 6-2
Cargo area light (if equipped) .............................. 6-2
Map light (if equipped)........................................ 6-2
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3
Vanity mirror (if equipped) ................................... 6-3
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-4
Glove box ........................................................... 6-4
Center console.................................................... 6-4
Coin tray............................................................. 6-4
Pocket (if equipped) ............................................ 6-5
Cup holders ......................................................... 6-5
Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-5
Rear passenger’s cup holder (if equipped) ........... 6-6
Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-6
Use with a cigarette lighter
(Canada only, if equipped).................................. 6-7
Ashtray (Canada only, if equipped) .................... 6-8
Floor mat (if equipped)........................................ 6-9
Coat hooks........................................................... 6-9
Cargo area cover (Wagon – if equipped) ......... 6-10
Using the cover ................................................. 6-10
To remove the cover .......................................... 6-10
Stowage of the cover ......................................... 6-11
To install the cover housing ............................... 6-11
Cargo tie-down hooks
(Wagon – if equipped) .................................... 6-11
Cargo area bars (Wagon) .................................. 6-12
Under-floor storage compartment
(Wagon – if equipped) .................................... 6-12
Interior equipment
6
Black plate (190,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
6-2 Interior equipment
Interior lights
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the
light goes out to avoid battery discharge.
& Dome light
The dome light switch has three positions:
ON: The light stays on continuously.
DOOR (middle position): The light
comes on when any of the doors (or the
rear gate on wagon) is opened. The light
remains on for several seconds and
gradually goes out after all doors (and
the rear gate on the wagon) are closed or
if the key is turned to the “ON” position.
The light also can be turned on by use of
the remote keyless entry transmitter. See
the “Remote keyless entry system” section in chapter 2 for detailed information.
OFF: The light stays off.
& Cargo area light (if equipped)
DOOR: The light comes on only when the
rear gate is opened.
OFF: The light stays off.
Map light (if equipped)
Vehicle with moonroof
Vehicle without moonroof
To turn on the map light, push the switch.
To turn it off, push the switch again.
Black plate (191,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the
light is turned off to avoid battery discharge.
Sun visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
& Vanity mirror (if equipped)
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
dazzle.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
Interior equipment 6-3
6
Black plate (192,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
6-4 Interior equipment
Storage compartment
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compartment.
& Glove box
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise.
& Center console
To open the lid, pull up the lock release.
& Coin tray
To open the coin tray, pull the upper edge
Black plate (193,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
of the lid.
& Pocket (if equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use the pocket as an ashtray
or leave a lighted cigarette in the
pocket. This could cause a fire.
To use the pocket, push lightly on the lid
below the climate controls.
Cup holders
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,
if hot, might burn you or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.
& Front passenger’s cup holder
CAUTION
Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an accident.
A dual cup holder is built in the center
console, beside the parking brake lever.
Interior equipment 6-5
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (194,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
6-6 Interior equipment
& Rear passenger’s cup holder
(if equipped)
CAUTION
When not in use, always keep the
cup holder stored while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a sudden stop or an accident.
A dual cup holder is located at the back of
the center console. To use the cup holder,
open the lid by pulling its upper edge.
Accessory power outlets
Power outlet beside front pocket
Power outlet in cargo area (if equipped)
Accessory power outlets are provided
beside the front pocket and in the cargo
area. Electrical power (12V DC) from the
battery is available at any of the outlets
when the ignition switch is in either the
“Acc” or “ON” position.
You can use an in-car electrical appliance
by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected varies among
outlets as shown in the following. Do not
use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
Outlet beside front pocket: 80W or less
Outlets in cargo area: 120W or less
When using appliances connected to two
outlets simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not exceed
120W.
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the cargo area power
outlet.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the accessory power outlet when it is not
in use.
. Use only electrical appliances
Black plate (195,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
which are designed for 12V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
varies among outlets as shown in
the following. Do not use an
appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet.
Outlet beside front pocket: 80W
or less
Outlet in cargo area: 120W or
less
When using appliances connected to two outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not exceed
120W. Overloading the accessory
power outlet can cause a short
circuit. Do not use dual adapters
or more than one electrical appliance.
. If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord
on your electrical appliance will
not interfere with your shifting
gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they
do, do not use the electrical
appliance while driving.
& Use with a cigarette lighter
(Canada only, if equipped)
To use the accessory power outlet beside
the front pocket as a cigarette lighter
socket, purchase the cigarette lighter plug,
which is an optional accessory.
A cigarette lighter plug is available from
your SUBARU dealer.
The cigarette lighter operates only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc”
position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
knob and wait a few moments. It will
automatically spring up when ready for
use.
WARNING
To avoid being burned, never grasp
the lighter by the end with the
heating element. Doing so could
result in injury and could also
damage the heating element.
CAUTION
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
because it will overheat.
. The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the
instrument panel is originally designed to use a genuine SUBARU
cigarette lighter plug. Do not use
a non-genuine cigarette lighter
plug in the socket. Doing so
may cause a short-circuit and
overheating, resulting in a fire.
. If the socket is ever used for a
Interior equipment 6-7
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (196,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
6-8 Interior equipment
plug-in accessory such as a cell
phone, that may damage the
portion of the socket’s internal
mechanism that causes a cigarette lighter plug to “pop out”
after its lighter element is heated.
Therefore, do not place a cigarette lighter plug in a socket that
has been used, even once, to
power a plug-in accessory. Doing
so may cause the plug to stick
and overheat, creating a potential
fire hazard.
Ashtray (Canada only, if
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted cigarette
in an ashtray. This could cause a
fire.
It is possible to install an ashtray, which is
an optional accessory, in the front pocket.
The ashtray is available from your
SUBARU dealer.
To open the ashtray, push lightly on the lid
below the climate controls.
Fully close the lid after using it to help
reduce residual smoke.
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, hold
the right and left sides of the ashtray and
pull it out.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around the hinges of the ashtray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or other narrow-ended implement.
Black plate (197,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Floor mat (if equipped)
A retaining pin is located on the driver’s
side of the vehicle next to the fuel filler
door release.
The floor mat is secured using the built-in
grommet, by placing the grommet over the
pin and pushing downward.
CAUTION
Make sure the driver’s floor mat is
placed back in its proper location
and correctly secured on its retaining pin. If the floor mat slips forward
and interferes with the movement of
the pedals during driving, it could
cause an accident.
Coat hooks
The coat hook is attached to the rear left
and rear right passenger’s hand grip.
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in a
sudden stop or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 2.2 lbs (1 kg) or more.
Interior equipment 6-9
6
Black plate (198,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
6-10 Interior equipment
Cargo area cover (Wagon – if
equipped)
The cargo area cover is provided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
& Using the cover
To extend the cover, pull the end of the
cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.
WARNING
Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover.
Scratches on the stays could cause
leakage of gas from the stays, which
may result in their inability to hold
the rear gate open.
& To remove the cover
1. Rewind the cover.
2. Pull either sleeve on the end of the
cover housing to shorten the cover’s
length.
3. Take it off the retainer.
Black plate (199,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Stowage of the cover
For the vehicles equipped with an underfloor storage compartment, the cargo area
cover can be stowed under the cargo floor.
& To install the cover housing
1. Pull either sleeve on the end of the
cover housing to shorten the cover’s
length.
2. Insert the projections located on the
both ends of the sleeve into the recesses
of the retainers.
Cargo tie-down hooks (Wagon – if equipped)
The cargo area is equipped with four tiedown hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them
down out of the storing recesses. When
not in use, put the hooks up into the
storing recesses.
Interior equipment 6-11
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (200,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
6-12 Interior equipment
CAUTION
The cargo tie-down hooks are designed only for securing light cargo.
Never try to secure cargo that
exceeds the capacity of the hooks.
The maximum load capacity is 44
lbs (20 kg) per hook.
Cargo area bars (Wagon)
1) Cargo area bar
In the cargo area, there are two bars (one
on each side) to which a net can be
attached.
CAUTION
Do not place objects with a total
weight exceeding 6.6 lbs (3 kg) on a
net attached to the cargo area bars.
Under-floor storage compartment (Wagon – if equipped)
The storage compartment is located under
the floor of the cargo area and can be
used to store small items. To open the lid,
pull the tab up.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the storage
tray in the cargo area.
CAUTION
. Always keep the lids closed while
driving to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of a sudden
stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, containBlack plate (201,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compartment.
Interior equipment 6-13
6
Black plate (13,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-2
Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-2
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-4
State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-5
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-6
Starting the engine.............................................. 7-7
Manual transmission vehicle................................ 7-7
Automatic transmission vehicle ........................... 7-7
Stopping the engine............................................ 7-8
Manual transmission – 6 speeds (WRX-STI) ..... 7-9
Selecting reverse gear......................................... 7-9
Shifting speeds ................................................... 7-9
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-10
Manual transmission – 5 speeds (except
WRX-STI).......................................................... 7-11
Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-11
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-12
Driver’s Control Center Differential (DCCD)
(WRX-STI) ........................................................ 7-12
Auto mode ......................................................... 7-13
Manual mode ..................................................... 7-13
Temporary release.............................................. 7-15
Automatic transmission..................................... 7-15
Selector lever..................................................... 7-16
Shift lock release ............................................... 7-19
Limited slip differential (LSD)
(if equipped) .................................................... 7-20
Power steering................................................... 7-20
Braking ............................................................... 7-20
Braking tips....................................................... 7-20
Brake system .................................................... 7-21
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-21
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-21
ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-22
ABS warning light.............................................. 7-22
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system............................................................. 7-23
Steps to take if EBD system fails ....................... 7-23
Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-24
Parking brake .................................................... 7-24
Parking tips ....................................................... 7-25
Cruise control .................................................... 7-26
To set cruise control .......................................... 7-26
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-27
To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-27
To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-28
Starting and operating
7
Black plate (204,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-2 Starting and operating
Fuel
CAUTION
Use of a fuel which is low in quality
or use of an inappropriate fuel
additive may cause engine damage.
& Fuel requirements
! 2.5-liter non-turbo models
The 2.5-liter non-turbo engine is designed
to operate using unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.
! WRX
The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to
operate using premium unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If
premium unleaded gasoline is not available, regular unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be
temporarily used. For optimum engine
performance and driveability, it is required
that you use premium grade unleaded
gasoline.
NOTE
Be sure to use premium unleaded
gasoline of 91 AKI or higher for WRX.
If other gasoline (lower than 91 AKI) is
used, knocking, reduced output and
poor accelerator response will result.
! WRX-STI
The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to
operate using super-premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI or
higher. If super-premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI or
higher is not available, premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or
higher may be temporarily used. For
optimum engine performance and driveability, it is required that you use superpremium grade unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 93 AKI or higher.
NOTE
Be sure to use super-premium unleaded gasoline of 93 AKI or higher
for WRX-STI. If other gasoline (lower
than 93 AKI) is used, knocking, reduced output and poor accelerator
response will result.
! Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane
numbers and is commonly referred to as
the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane
rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine.
Do not be concerned if your vehicle
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive
up a hill or when you accelerate. See your
dealer or a qualified service technician if
you use a fuel with the specified octane
rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or
persistently.
! Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! Gasoline for California-certified
LEV
If your vehicle was certified to California’s
low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as
indicated on the underhood tune-up label,
it is designed to optimize engine and
emission performance with gasoline that
meets the clean burning low-sulfur California gasoline specifications. If you live in
any other state than California, your
vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
Federal specifications. Gasoline sold outside California is permitted to have higher
sulfur levels, which may affect the performance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
Black plate (205,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
a different brand of unleaded gasoline
having lower sulfur to determine if the
problem is fuel related before returning
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service.
! MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
happens, return to your authorized
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
be covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
Your use of gasoline with detergent
additives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
your vehicle, but should contain no more
than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the
proper operation of your SUBARU.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station
operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gasoline before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels containing alcohol may cause paint
damage, which is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Starting and operating 7-3
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (206,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-4 Starting and operating
& Fuel filler lid and cap
! Refueling
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid
release lever up. The lever is on the floor
at the left of the driver’s seat.
1) Open
2) Close
2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always
first stop the engine and make
sure that there are no lighted
cigarettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.
. When opening the cap, do not
remove the cap quickly. Fuel may
be under pressure and spray out
of the fuel filler neck especially in
hot weather, which may cause
injury.
3. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically stops. Do not add any
more fuel.
4. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain
not to catch the tether under the cap while
tightening.
5. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface,
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the
painted surface could be damaged.
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” or “FUEL
DOOR ” sign in the fuel gauge. This
indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is
located on the right side of the vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
warning light may come on. Refer to
the “Warning and indicator lights”
section located in chapter 3.
(Turbo model only) Promptly put fuel in
Black plate (207,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
the tank whenever the low fuel warning
light comes on. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
. Make sure that the cap is tightened until it clicks to prevent
fuel spillage in the event of an
accident.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle.
Fuels may cause paint damage,
which is not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit or have
proper venting, and your fuel
tank and emission control system might be damaged.
State emission testing (U.S.
only)
At state inspection time, remember to
tell your inspection or service station in
advance not to place your Subaru AWD
vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.
Some states have started using dynamometers in their state inspection programs
in order to meet their obligation under
federal law to implement stricter vehicle
emission standards to reduce air pollution
from vehicles. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows
your vehicle’s wheels to turn while the
vehicle remains in one place. Depending
on the severity of a state’s air pollution
problems, the states must adopt either a
“basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission
inspection test. Normally, a portion of the
basic emission test consists of an emission inspector inserting an analyzer probe
into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle
for a short period of time. States with more
severe air pollution problems are required
to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission
test. This test simulates actual driving
conditions on a dynamometer and permits
more accurate measurement of tailpipe
emitted pollution than the basic emission
test.
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
programs have EXEMPTED Subaru AWD
vehicles from the portion of the testing
program that involves a two-wheel dynamometer.
There are some states that use four-wheel
dynamometers in their testing programs.
When properly used, that equipment will
not damage an AWD Subaru vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected for
state emission testing.
WARNING
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle
must NEVER be performed on a
single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do so will result in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and
may cause an accident or injuries to
persons nearby.
Starting and operating 7-5
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (208,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-6 Starting and operating
CAUTION
Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or its
contractors or licensees.
The EPA has issued regulations for
inspecting the On-Board Diagnostic
(OBD) system as part of the state emissions inspection. The OBD system is
designed to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause vehicle
emissions to exceed allowable limits.
These inspections apply to all 1996 model
year and newer passenger cars and light
trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of
Columbia have implemented the OBD
system inspection.
. The inspection of the OBD system
consists of a visual operational check of
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and an
examination of the OBD system with an
electronic scan tool while the engine is
running.
. A vehicle passes the OBD system
inspection if proper the “CHECK ENGINE”
warning light/MIL illumination is observed,
there is no stored diagnostic trouble
codes, and the OBD system readiness
monitors are complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is
not properly operating or there are one or
more diagnostic trouble codes stored in
the vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK
ENGINE” warning light/MIL illuminated.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBD system readiness monitors “Not
Ready” is greater than one. Under this
condition, the vehicle operator should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few
days to set the monitors and return for an
emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
service.
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that the hood, trunk (Sedan)
and rear gate (Wagon) are fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside
and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights after starting the engine.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,
washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
Black plate (209,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Starting the engine
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10 seconds. If the engine fails to start after
operating the starter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
more before trying again.
& Manual transmission vehicle
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and
shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the
clutch pedal to the floor while starting the
engine.
The starter motor will only operate when
the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the
floor.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to the
“Warning and indicator lights” section
(chapter 3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, try the
following.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “OFF”
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have gone off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
NOTE
The engine may be difficult to start
when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
& Automatic transmission vehicle
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N”
position (preferably “P” position).
The starter motor will only operate when
the selector lever is at the “P” or “N”
position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to the
“Warning and indicator lights” section
(chapter 3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
Starting and operating 7-7
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (210,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-8 Starting and operating
position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, try the
following.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “OFF”
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have gone out after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make
sure that the selector lever is at the “P” or
“N” position and that the parking brake is
applied.
NOTE
The engine may be difficult to start
when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, shift the selector
lever into the “N” position. Do not
attempt to place the selector lever of
a moving vehicle into the “P” position.
Stopping the engine
The ignition switch should be turned off
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
engine is idling.
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
and the brake booster, making steering and braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental activation of the “LOCK” position on the
ignition switch, causing the steering
wheel to lock.
Black plate (211,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Manual transmission – 6
speeds (WRX-STI)
The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed, 6-forward-speed and 1-reverse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift
lever knob.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or with
the shift lever in the neutral position.
Engine braking has no effect in
either of these conditions and the
risk of an accident is consequently
increased.
& Selecting reverse gear
1) Slider
You must raise the slider and hold it in that
position before you can move the shift
lever to the “R” position.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch
pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
transmission in neutral, release the clutch
pedal momentarily, and then try again.
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the
vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmission to try shifting into reverse when
the vehicle is moving.
& Shifting speeds
! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel economy and vehicle performance during
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table.
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (64)
4th to 5th 45 (72)
5th to 6th 50 (80)
Starting and operating 7-9
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (212,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-10 Starting and operating
! Maximum allowable speeds
The following table shows the maximum
speeds that are possible with each different gear. The tachometer’s needle will
enter the red area if these speeds are
exceeded.
With the exception of cases where sudden
acceleration is required, the vehicle
should not be driven with the tachometer’s
needle inside the red area. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
excessive engine wear and poor fuel
economy.
Gear mph (km/h)
1st 33 (53)
2nd 53 (86)
3rd 78 (126)
4th 89 (169)
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
engine over-revving and this in turn
can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can
lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the vehicle may
be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
NOTE
Never exceed posted speed limits.
& Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
shift lever. This may cause wear on the
transmission components.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
lower gear before the engine starts to
labor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the
transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
speed and to extend brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
the brakes while descending a hill, they
may overheat and not work properly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
phenomenon does not indicate a malfunction.
Black plate (213,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Manual transmission – 5
speeds (except WRX-STI)
The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-reverse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift
lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to
reverse gear, first return the shift lever to
the neutral position then shift into reverse
gear.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch
pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
transmission in neutral, release the clutch
pedal momentarily, and then try again.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or with
the shift lever in the neutral position.
Engine braking has no effect in
either of these conditions and the
risk of an accident is consequently
increased.
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the
vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmission to try shifting into reverse when
the vehicle is moving.
& Shifting speeds
! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel economy and vehicle performance during
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table.
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (65)
4th to 5th 45 (73)
! Maximum allowable speeds
The following tables show the maximum
speeds that are possible with each different gear.
Never exceed the speed limit listed in the
following table for each gear position
except for brief acceleration in an emergency. The tachometer’s needle will enter
the red area if these speeds are exceeded. Failure to observe this precaution
can lead to excessive engine wear and
poor fuel economy.
Non-turbo models
mph (km/h)
1st 31 (50)
2nd 52 (84)
3rd 75 (120)
Starting and operating 7-11
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (214,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-12 Starting and operating
Turbo models
mph (km/h)
1st 34 (54)
2nd 59 (95)
3rd 85 (136)
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
engine over-revving and this in turn
can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can
lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the vehicle may
be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
& Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
shift lever. This may cause wear on the
transmission components.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
lower gear before the engine starts to
labor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the
transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as
necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
speed and to extend brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
the brakes while descending a hill, they
may overheat and not work properly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
phenomenon is not an indication of a
problem in your vehicle.
Driver’s Control Center Differential (DCCD) (WRX-STI)
WARNING
Always use the utmost care when
driving. Being overconfident because you are driving a vehicle with
a driver’s control center differential
could easily lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
In the event of failure of the driver’s
control center differential, the “ ”
indicator light will flash. Have the
vehicle inspected by your SUBARU
Black plate (215,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
dealer.
The driver’s control center differential
allows you to freely change the degree
of limitation of the differential action
(limited slip differential (LSD) torque) of
your vehicle’s center differential.
By using the center differential control dial,
you can set an initial LSD torque to match
the road surface conditions, driving conditions and your driving style.
1) LSD torque
2) Traction torque
A) Initial LSD torque (adjustable)
B) Mechanical LSD torque
& Auto mode
In the auto mode, the system estimates
the driving and road conditions using
signals from the wheel speed sensor,
throttle position sensor, steering angle
sensor and brake switch, etc. According
to the result, it electronically and automatically controls the degree of limitation
of the differential action (LSD torque) to
optimize the differential action of the
center differential. When the ignition
switch is turned ON, the “AUTO” indicator
light in the combination meter comes on.
The system can be switched to a manual
mode.
& Manual mode
In the manual mode, you can use the
center differential control dial to adjust the
initial LSD torque as desired. When this
mode is selected, the “AUTO” indicator
light in the combination meter goes off.
! Manual switch
Press the “DCCD-MANU” switch on the
center console to switch from auto mode
to manual mode. The “AUTO” indicator
light in the combination meter will go off.
Press the switch again to go back to auto
mode. The “AUTO” indicator light in the
combination meter will come on.
Starting and operating 7-13
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (216,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-14 Starting and operating
! Center differential control dial and
indicator light
The control dial is located beside the
parking brake lever. By turning the control
dial forward and rearward, it is possible to
change the initial LSD torque.
The center differential indicator lights in
the combination meter give six levels of
indication. The indicator lights and control
dial are linked; when the dial is turned to
change the initial LSD torque, the illumination position of the indicator lights
changes accordingly.
Turn the dial forward to increase the initial
LSD torque; when the white line on the
dial reaches the frontmost position, the
initial LSD torque setting is maximum. The
center differential will then be almost
completely locked and the “LOCK” indicator light will come on.
Turn the dial rearward to reduce the initial
LSD torque; when the white line reaches
the rearmost position, the initial LSD
torque will be minimum and the “ ”
indicator light will come on. Under this
condition, only the Mechanical LSD torque
will limit the differential action.
CAUTION
. Do not turn the control dial when
a wheel slippage occurs. Wait
until the wheelspin has been
brought under control.
. Under any of the following conditions, turn the center differential control dial to the rearmost
position to minimize the initial
LSD torque:
Black plate (217,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
. When a temporary spare tire is
installed
. When your vehicle is towed
. When the vehicle is stopped
with the manual mode selected
NOTE
. A higher initial LSD torque setting
gives the vehicle greater traction when
driving straight ahead but makes cornering more difficult. Remember this
when adjusting the initial LSD torque.
In general, higher initial LSD torque
settings assist driving on slippery
roads and lower settings for non-slippery roads. If you become stuck in
snow or mud, turning the center differential control dial to the frontmost
position will help move the vehicle
out. (The “LOCK” indicator will come
on at the frontmost position.)
. During cornering or when making
turns (especially when getting into the
garage), the rotational difference between the front and rear wheels may
cause a braking effect accompanied by
vibration and noise. This does not
indicate a problem. The phenomenon
will disappear when you turn the center
differential control dial to the rearmost
position (minimum initial LSD torque
position).
In the auto mode, it controls the initial
LSD torque automatically. While in the
auto mode, this phenomenon sometimes occurs depending on the driving
condition, however, it does not indicate
a problem.
. Use the center differential indicator
light only as a rough indication of the
initial LSD torque.
. If you operate the center differential
control dial while quickly accelerating
or turning a tight corner, you may feel
slight shocks. This is due to differential
action by the center differential and
does not indicate a problem.
& Temporary release
When the driver stops the vehicle and
pulls the parking brake lever after manually setting the initial LSD torque, the LSD
torque is temporarily minimized. However
the indicator in the combination meter
continues to show the driver’s selected
initial LSD torque. When the driver releases the parking brake lever, the initial
LSD torque set by the driver is restored.
Automatic transmission
The automatic transmission is electronically controlled and provides 4 forward
speeds and 1 reverse speed.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant temperature is still low, your vehicle’s automatic transmission will up-shift at higher engine speeds than when the coolant temperature is sufficiently high in
order to shorten the warm-up time and
improve driveability. The gearshift timing will automatically shift to the normal timing after the engine has warmed
up.
. Immediately after ATF (automatic
transmission fluid) is replaced, you
may feel that the automatic transmission operation is somewhat unusual.
This results from invalidation of data
the on-board computer has collected
and stored in memory to allow the
transmission to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition of
your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be
restored as the vehicle continues to be
driven for a while.
Starting and operating 7-15
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (218,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-16 Starting and operating
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or
“R” position while depressing the
accelerator pedal. This may cause
the vehicle to jump forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position
only after the vehicle is completely stopped. Shifting while the
vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
except the “N” or “P” position
when the brake is set or when
chocks are used in the wheels.
This may cause the automatic
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Avoid shifting from one of the
forward driving positions into the
“R” position or vice versa until
the vehicle has completely
stopped. Such shifting may
cause damage to the transmission.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the selector lever
in the “P” position. Avoid parking
for a long time with the selector
lever in any other position as
doing so could result in a dead
battery.
& Selector lever
: With the brake pedal depressed, move
the lever along the gate.
: Move the lever along the gate.
The selector lever has seven positions.
! P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the vehicle
from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the
parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the transmission.
A shift interlock function is employed in the
automatic transmission system to ensure
safe starting of the vehicle.
Black plate (219,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
To shift the selector lever from the “P”
position to any other position, you have to
depress the brake pedal fully when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. This
prevents the vehicle from lurching when it
is started.
If the shift lever does not move from the
“P” position with the brake pedal depressed, refer to the “Shift lock release”
section in this chapter.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, first
stop the vehicle completely then move the
lever to the “R” position.
! N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine.
In this position the wheels and transmission are not locked. In this position, the
transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll
freely, even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or foot brake is on.
Avoid coasting with the transmission
neutral.
During coasting, there is no engine braking effect.
NOTE
If you stop the engine with the selector
lever in the “N” position, move the
selector lever to the “P” position
immediately. Otherwise, you may find
that the selector lever soon cannot be
moved to the “P” position. If you find
that the selector lever cannot be moved
from the “N” position to the “P” position, turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position and try again.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
selector lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently increased.
! D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving.
The transmission automatically shifts into
a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to
the vehicle speed and the acceleration
you require.
When more acceleration is required in this
position, press the accelerator pedal fully
to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift
to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release
the pedal, the transmission will return to
the original gear position.
! While climbing a grade
When driving up hill, undesired upshift to
4th gear is prevented from taking place
when the accelerator pedal is released.
This minimizes the chances of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when
accelerating again. This prevents repeated upshifting and downshifting resulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd
or 1st gear, depending on the way the
accelerator pedal is pressed to accelerate the vehicle again.
! While going down a hill
When descending a steep hill, depressing
the brake pedal will cause the transmission to downshift to 3rd gear, thus applying engine braking. Reacceleration for a
short time will cause the transmission to
upshift normally.
NOTE
In some cases, depressing the brake
pedal on a downhill grade does not
result in an automatic downshift to 3rd
gear. This can happen when the autoStarting and operating 7-17
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (220,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-18 Starting and operating
matic transmission fluid temperature is
very low, for example, during driving
shortly after the vehicle has been
parked for an extended period of time.
When the ATF temperature has risen to
a certain level, automatic downshift
normally takes place. In the meantime,
downshift manually for engine braking
as required.
Also, downshifting when braking
downhill will not occur at speeds above
approximately 48 mph (78 km/h).
! 3 (Third)
This position is for using engine braking
when going down a hill or for climbing a
grade.
The transmission automatically shifts into
a suitable gear from 1st to 3rd according
to the vehicle speed and the acceleration
you require.
When more acceleration is required in this
position, press the accelerator pedal fully
to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift
to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the
pedal, the transmission will return to the
original gear position.
! 2 (Second)
This position is for using engine braking
when going down a hill or for climbing a
steep grade.
In this position, the transmission holds in
the 2nd gear.
Use this position when starting off from a
standstill on slippery road surfaces such
as mud or snow. It will ensure greater
traction.
! 1 (First)
This position is for driving up or down very
steep grades, or driving through mud or
sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this
position, the transmission holds in the
1st gear.
! Maximum speeds
The following table shows the maximum
speeds that are possible with each different gear.
When shifting down a gear, it is important
to confirm that the current vehicle speed is
not in excess of the Maximum Allowable
Speed of the gear which is about to be
selected.
mph (km/h)
Non-turbo models Turbo models
1 28 (45) 28 (45)
2 62 (100) 65 (104)
3 97 (156) 104 (167)
NOTE
In order to prevent over-revving during
deceleration of the vehicle, the transmission will remain in the current gear
if the speed of the vehicle is in excess
of the Maximum Allowable Speed for
the gear to which the selector lever has
been moved.
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
engine over-revving and this in turn
can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can
lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the vehicle may
be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
! Driving tips
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D”, “3”,
“2”, “1” or “R” position.
Black plate (221,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
. Always set the parking brake when
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
“D”, “3”, “2”, or “1” position. Use the brake
instead.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
phenomenon is not an indication of a
problem in your vehicle.
& Shift lock release
If the selector lever does not move from
the “P” position with the brake pedal
depressed and the ignition switch in the
“ON” position, perform the following steps:
To override the shift lock:
1. Set the parking brake and stop the
engine.
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool
bag.
3. Remove the cover by prying on the
edge with the screwdriver.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.
5. Push down on the screwdriver and
move the selector lever from the “P” to the
“N” position.
6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.
Depress the brake pedal and start the
engine.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU
dealer immediately to have the system
repaired.
Starting and operating 7-19
7
Black plate (222,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-20 Starting and operating
Limited slip differential (LSD)
(if equipped)
The LSD provides optimum distribution of
power according to the difference in
revolutions between the right and left
wheels that may be caused by certain
driving conditions, thereby improving driving stability on snow-covered, muddy or
other slippery roads or when high speed
driving.
CAUTION
. Never start the engine while a tire
on one side is jacked up, as the
vehicle may move.
. If one tire is spinning in mud,
avoid continued spinning at high
speed as this could adversely
affect the LSD.
. If you use a temporary spare tire
to replace a flat tire, be sure to
use the original temporary spare
tire stored in the vehicle. Using
other sizes will adversely affect
the LSD.
Power steering
The power steering system operates only
when the engine is running.
If you lose power steering assist because
the engine stops or the system fails to
function, you can steer but it will take
much more effort.
NOTE
Right after the engine has been started
and before it has warmed up, you may
hear a noise coming from areas adjacent to the power steering pump which
is located at the right-front area of the
engine compartment. This noise is
normal. It does not indicate power
steering system trouble.
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the
fully locked position left or right for
more than 5 seconds. This may
damage the power steering pump.
Braking
& Braking tips
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads and linings.
! When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to
get stronger engine braking.
Black plate (223,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
! Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
& Brake system
! Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has two separate circuit
brake systems. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of
the brake system should fail, the other half
of the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not
turn off the engine while driving because
that will turn off the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to push the pedal much harder
than normal and the braking distance will
increase.
& Disc brake pad wear warning
indicators
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle checked by
your SUBARU dealer.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
wheels which may occur during sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of
steering control and directional stability
caused by wheel lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
when the ABS operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the
vehicle speed is below approximately 6
mph (10 km/h).
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving with an ABS
equipped vehicle could easily lead
to a serious accident.
CAUTION
. The ABS system does not always
decrease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
Starting and operating 7-21
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (224,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-22 Starting and operating
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS
system than one without. When
driving under these conditions,
therefore, reduce your speed and
leave ample distance from other
vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS system
operating, you should maintain
constant brake pedal pressure.
Do not pump the brake pedal
since doing so may defeat the
operation of the ABS system.
& ABS system self-check
Just after the vehicle is started, you may
feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
to when the ABS operates, and you may
also hear the sound of the ABS working
from the engine compartment. This is
caused by an automatic functional test of
the ABS system being carried out and
does not indicate any abnormal condition.
& ABS warning light
The ABS warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position and goes out after approximately
2 seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system
is working properly.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may come
on. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will go out.
CAUTION
If the warning light behaves as
follows, the ABS system may not
be working properly.
When the warning light is on, the
ABS function shuts down; however,
the conventional brake system continues to operate normally.
. The warning light does not come
on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
. The warning light comes on when
the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position, but it does not
go out even when the vehicle
speed exceeds approximately 8
mph (12 km/h).
. The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system
repaired at the first available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following, the ABS
system may be considered normal.
. The warning light comes on right
after the engine is started but goes out
Black plate (225,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains on after
the engine has been started, but it goes
out when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
. The warning light comes on during
driving, but it goes out immediately and
remains off.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
the distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS system and uses some of the ABS
system’s components to perform its function of optimizing the distribution of braking force. If any of the ABS components
used by the EBD function fail, the EBD
system also stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
& Steps to take if EBD system
fails
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the brake
system warning light and ABS warning
light come on simultaneously.
The EBD system may be faulty if the
brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
Starting and operating 7-23
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (226,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-24 Starting and operating
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, apply the
parking brake and then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights go out, the EBD system
may be faulty. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
4. If both warning lights come on again
and stay illuminated after the engine has
been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest
SUBARU dealer and have the system
inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, have the
brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
Parking your vehicle
& Parking brake
To set the parking brake, press the brake
pedal firmly and hold it down while fully
pulling up the parking brake lever.
To release the parking brake, pull the lever
up slightly, press the release button, then
lower the lever while keeping the button
pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the
engine is running, the parking brake
warning light comes on. After starting the
vehicle, be sure that the warning light has
gone out before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights”
section (chapter 3).
Black plate (227,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
CAUTION
Never drive while the parking brake
is set because this will cause unnecessary wear on the brake linings. Before starting to drive, always
make sure that the parking brake
has been fully released.
& Parking tips
When parking your vehicle, always set the
parking brake firmly and put the shift lever
in the “1” (1st) for an upgrade or “R”
(Reverse) for a downgrade for manual
transmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park)
position for automatic transmission vehicles. Always set the parking brake firmly
when parking your vehicle. Never rely on
the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel. When the vehicle is
headed up the hill, the front wheels should
be turned away from the curb.
When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people.
. Do not park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust system parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front underspoiler and rear underspoiler (both
optional), pay attention to blocks
Starting and operating 7-25
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (228,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-26 Starting and operating
and other obstructions on the
ground when parking. The underspoilers could be damaged by contact with them.
Cruise control
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the
main switch is turned “OFF” when the
cruise control is not in use to avoid
unintentionally setting the cruise control.
NOTE
If you move the cruise control lever or
press the main switch button while
turning the ignition switch “ON”, the
cruise control function is deactivated
and the “CRUISE” indicator light
flashes. To reactivate the cruise control
function, turn the ignition switch back
to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and
then turn it again to the “ON” position.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions. This
may cause loss of vehicle control:
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
& To set cruise control
1. Push the main switch button.
The “ ” indicator light on the combination meter will come on.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
Black plate (229,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
3. Push the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction and release it.
Then release the accelerator pedal.
At this time, the “ ” indicator light is
illuminated in the combination meter.
The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.
& To temporarily cancel the
cruise control
There are five ways to cancel the cruise
control temporarily:
. Pull the control lever in the “CANCEL”
direction.
. Depress the brake pedal.
. Depress the clutch pedal (manual
transmission vehicles only).
. Shift the selector lever into the “N”
position (automatic transmission vehicles
only).
. Shift the shift lever into neutral position
(manual transmission vehicles only).
The “ ” indicator light in the combination
meter goes off when the cruise control is
canceled.
To resume the cruise control after it has
been temporarily canceled and with vehicle speed of approximately 20 mph (32
km/h) or more, push the control lever
upward in the “RES/ACC” direction to
return to the original cruising speed automatically.
The “ ” indicator light in the combination
meter will automatically come on at this
time.
& To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise
control:
. Push the main switch again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
Starting and operating 7-27
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (230,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7-28 Starting and operating
& To change the cruising speed
! To increase the speed (by control
lever)
Push the control lever upward in the “RES/
ACC” direction and hold it until the vehicle
reaches the desired speed. Then, release
the control lever. The vehicle speed at that
moment will be memorized and treated as
the new set speed.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
by pressing the control lever upward in the
“RES/ACC” direction quickly.
! To increase the speed (by accelerator pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
2. Push the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction once. Now the
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
If the difference between the actual
vehicle speed when the control lever
is pushed downward and the speed last
time you set is less than 4 mph (6.8
km/h), the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs
because the cruise control system unit
regards this lever operation as that
intended to decrease the vehicle
speed.
! To decrease the speed (by control
lever)
Push the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction and hold it until
the vehicle reaches the desired speed.
Then, release the control lever. The
vehicle speed at that moment will be
memorized and treated as the new set
speed.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
pressing the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction quickly.
Black plate (231,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed, press the control lever
downward in the “SET/COAST” direction
once. Now the desired speed is set and
the vehicle will keep running at that speed
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
Starting and operating 7-29
7
Black plate (15,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 20
New vehicle break-in driving – the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ........... 8-2
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6
All AWD models except OUTBACK SPORT .......... 8-6
OUTBACK SPORT............................................... 8-6
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8
Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10
Tire chains......................................................... 8-11
Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-12
Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-13
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-14
Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) ................... 8-14
Trailer hitch (if equipped) .................................. 8-17
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-18
When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-19
Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-20
Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-20
Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-20
Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-23
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-24
Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-25
STI front lip spoiler (if equipped)...................... 8-28
Driving tips
8
Black plate (234,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-2 Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km)
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
slow.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid
acceleration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braking, except in an
emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to an overhauled engine, newly
mounted engine or when brake pads or
brake linings are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints
The following suggestions will help to save
your fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for as long as
possible.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire placard, which
is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the front and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system always works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
Black plate (235,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid (Sedan) or rear
gate (Wagon) closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from
entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the exhaust system for a short time after the
engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
Catalytic converter
Turbo models
Non-turbo models
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, backfiring or incomplete combustion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust system.
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g.
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
operates at very high temperatures.
Driving tips 8-3
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (236,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-4 Driving tips
. Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recommended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” performed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
Driving in foreign countries
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. (Refer to the “Fuel requirements”
section in chapter 7.)
. Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.
Black plate (237,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Driving tips for AWD vehicles
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles
provide better traction when driving on
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
By shifting power between the front and
rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also
provide added traction during acceleration
and added engine braking force during
deceleration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging
the AWD system, you should keep the
following tips in mind:
. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in handling,
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. When replacing a tire, make sure you
use only the same size, construction,
brand, and load range as the original tires
listed on the tire placard. Using other
sizes, circumference or construction may
result in severe mechanical damage to the
drive train of your vehicle and may affect
ride, handling, braking, speedometer/odometer calibration, and clearance between the body and tires. It also may be
dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle
control.
. If you use a temporary spare tire to
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
original temporary spare tire stored in the
vehicle. Using other sizes may result in
severe mechanical damage to the drive
train of your vehicle.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the
tire placard, which is located under the
door latch on the driver’s side.
. Tire chains should always be placed on
the front wheels only.
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detail information, see the “Towing”
section in chapter 9.
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because you are driving an AllWheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
Driving tips 8-5
8
Black plate (238,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-6 Driving tips
Off road driving
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because you are driving an AllWheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
Do not drive on rough roads or over
curbs in a vehicle that has 17-inch
or other ultra-low-profile tires. The
wheels and tires could be damaged
by shock forces, leading to abnormal vibration or poor straight-line
tracking. Driving would then be
more difficult.
& All AWD models except
OUTBACK SPORT
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain
vehicle. It is a passenger vehicle designed
primarily for on-road use. The AWD
feature gives it some limited off-road
capabilities in situations in which driving
surfaces are relatively level, obstructionfree and otherwise similar to on-road
driving conditions. Operating it under other
than those conditions could subject the
vehicle to excessive stress which might
result in damage not eligible for repair
under warranty. If you do take your
SUBARU off-road, you should review the
common sense precautions in the next
section (applicable to the OUTBACK
SPORT) for general guidance. But please
keep in mind that your vehicle’s off-road
capabilities are more limited than those of
the OUTBACK SPORT.
Never attempt to drive through pools and
puddles, or roads flooded with water.
Water entering the engine air intake or
the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall.
& OUTBACK SPORT
Your Subaru can be driven on ordinary
roads or off-road. But please keep in mind
that an AWD SUBARU is a passenger
vehicle and is neither a conventional offroad vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If
you do take your SUBARU off-road,
certain common sense precautions such
as the following should be taken:
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
. Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
all times. When driving off-road, you will
not have the benefit of marked traffic
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. A vehicle can much
more easily tip over sideways than it can
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
down slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
Black plate (239,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
with your fingers and thumbs on the
outside of the rim.
. If driving through water, such as when
crossing shallow streams, first check the
depth of the water and the bottom of the
stream bed for firmness and ensure that
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
and completely through the stream. The
water should be shallow enough that it
does not reach the vehicle’s undercarriage. Water entering the engine air intake
or the exhaust pipe or water splashing
onto electrical parts may damage your
vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never
attempt to drive through rushing water;
regardless of its depth, it can wash away
the ground from under your tires, resulting
in possible loss of traction and even
vehicle rollover.
. Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand,
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat
that process several times to dry out the
brake discs and brake pads.
. Do not drive or park over or near
flammable materials such as dry grass or
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The
exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and right after the
engine stops. This could create a fire
hazard.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such matter from
the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering to the
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
fire could occur.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not
piled higher than the seatbacks. During
sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo
could be thrown around in the vehicle and
cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity and make it more prone
to tip over.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the selector lever
back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this manual.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
under hard-driving conditions such as
rough roads or off roads will necessitate
more frequent replacement of engine oil,
brake fluid and transmission oil than that
specified in the maintenance schedule
described in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Remember that damage done to your
Subaru while operating it off-road and
not using common sense precautions
such as those listed above is not eligible
for warranty coverage.
. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after offroad driving. Suspension components are
particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
need to be washed thoroughly.
Driving tips 8-7
8
Black plate (240,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-8 Driving tips
Winter driving
& Operation during cold
weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of
sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper
cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold
temperatures reduce battery capacity.
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and
viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer
oil will cause harder starting.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen,
use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid Concentration Freezing Temperature
30% 10.48F (−128C)
50% −48F (−208C)
100% −498F (−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside
temperature. If the concentration is
inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid
may freeze on the windshield and
obstruct your view, and the fluid
may freeze in the reservoir tank.
! Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and
dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has
accumulated under the fenders to avoid
making steering difficult. During severe
Black plate (241,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
winter driving, stop when and where it is
safe to do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
Do not use the parking brake when
parking for long periods in cold weather
since it could freeze in that position.
Instead, observe the following.
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for
manual transmission vehicles, and in “P”
for automatic transmission vehicles.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or
when it snows, raise the wiper blades off
the glass to prevent damage to them.
When the vehicle has been left parked
after use on roads heavily covered with
snow, or has been left parked during a
snowstorm, icing may develop on the
brake system, which could cause poor
braking action. Check for snow or ice
buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,
being careful not to damage the disc
brakes and brake hoses and ABS harness.
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine
running.
! Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose. When an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used
for an extended period, it is best to have
the fuel tank filled to capacity.
& Driving on snowy and icy
roads
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, highspeed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehicle’s braking performance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to
the “ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)” section in chapter 7 for information on braking
on slippery surfaces.
NOTE
The following tires are summer tires.
Compared with winter and all-season
tires, summer tires give significantly
less grip on snowy and icy road
surfaces. Avoid driving on snowy and
icy road surface with summer tires.
. 225/45R17 tires for WRX-STI
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of
vehicle control.
Driving tips 8-9
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (242,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-10 Driving tips
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engine’s intake system and may
hinder the air flow, which could
result in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
! Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windshield or rear window. If the wiper
blades are frozen to the windshield or rear
window, use the defroster with the airflow
control dial in the “ ” position and the
temperature control dial set for maximum
warmth until the wiper blades are completely thawed out. If your vehicle is
equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful
to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To
thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear
window defogger.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
with the airflow control dial in “ ” and the
temperature control dial set for maximum
warmth. After the windshield gets warmed
enough to melt the frozen snow on it,
wash it away using the windshield washer.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and subzero temperatures. Blades of this type
give superior wiping performance in
snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades
that are suitable for your vehicle.
CAUTION
During high-speed driving, nonfreezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freezing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion protection
Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section
(chapter 10).
& Snow tires
! All models except WRX-STI
WARNING
. When replacing original tires with
winter (snow) tires, make sure
you use only the same size,
construction and load range as
the original tires listed on the tire
placard. Using other sizes and
construction may affect speedometer/odometer calibration and
clearance between the body and
tires. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle control.
. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, construction, brand, and load range.
Mixing other sizes or constructions may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive
train of your vehicle and may
affect ride, handling, braking and
speedometer/odometer calibration. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle control.
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
Black plate (243,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
tires” as original equipment, which are
designed to provide an adequate measure
of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving. In winter, it
may be possible to enhance performance
through use of tires designed specifically
for winter driving conditions.
When you choose to install winter tires on
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
size and type. You must install four winter
tires that are of the same size, construction, brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
! WRX-STI
WARNING
. When replacing original tires with
winter (snow) tires, make sure
you use only the same size,
construction and load range as
the original tires listed on the tire
placard. Using other sizes and
construction may affect speedometer/odometer calibration and
clearance between the body and
tires. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle control.
. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, construction, brand, and load range.
Mixing other sizes or constructions may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive
train of your vehicle and may
affect ride, handling, braking and
speedometer/odometer calibration. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle control.
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “summer
tires” as original equipment, which are
inadequate for driving on slippery roads
such as on snow-covered or icy roads.
Compared with winter and all-season
tires, summer tires give significantly less
grip on snowy and icy road surfaces.
Therefore, use of winter tires is strongly
recommended when driving with such
road conditions.
When you choose to install winter tires on
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
size and type. You must install four winter
tires that are of the same size, construction, brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
& Tire chains
Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may
require the use of tire chains, in which
case put the chains on the front wheels
only. Use only SAE class S type chains
that are of the correct size for your tires so
as not to damage the vehicle body or
suspension.
When driving with tire chains, drive at
Driving tips 8-11
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (244,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-12 Driving tips
speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h).
When a temporary spare tire is on a front
wheel, replace the temporary spare tire
with the rear tire on the same side of the
vehicle, and then fit chains on the front
tires.
Always use the utmost care when driving
with tire chains — overconfidence because you are driving with tire chains
could easily lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on tires
listed in the following because of
lack of clearance between the tires
and vehicle body.
. 225/45R17 tires for WRX-STI
. 215/45R17 tires for WRX
& Rocking the vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector
lever back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
Refer to the “Automatic transmission”
section in chapter 7 for information on
holding the transmission in 2nd position.
Loading your vehicle
WARNING
. Never allow passengers to ride
on a folded rear seatback, in the
trunk or in the cargo area. Doing
so may result in serious injury.
. Never stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as
possible.
Black plate (245,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
WARNING
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehicle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure lengthy items properly to
prevent them from shooting forward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the rear
shelf behind the rear seatback
(for Sedan) or the extended cargo
area cover (for Wagon). Such
items could tumble forward in
the event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
& Vehicle capacity weight
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
Driving tips 8-13
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (246,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-14 Driving tips
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The certification plate attached to the
driver’s side doorjamb shows GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
optional equipment and trailer tongue
load. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. The GVWR
equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle – including standard equipment,
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire
assembly) plus the vehicle capacity
weight.
In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
vehicle scale, found at a commercial
weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because they
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher load
range than the originals do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
& Roof rail and crossbar (if
equipped)
1) Crossbar kit
The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo
by itself. Cargo can be carried after
securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof
rail and installing the appropriate carrying
attachment. When installing the roof
crossbar kit, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
When you carry cargo on the roof using
the roof crossbar kit and a carrying
attachment, never exceed the maximum
load limit explained in the following. You
should also be careful that your vehicle
does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). See the
Black plate (247,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
“Loading your vehicle” section in this
chapter for information on loading cargo
into or onto your vehicle. The maximum
load limit of the cargo, crossbars and
carrying attachment must not exceed 100
lbs (45 kg). Place the heaviest load at the
bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly
distribute the cargo. Always properly
secure all cargo.
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rail must be used together
with a roof crossbar kit and the
appropriate carrying attachment.
The roof rail must never be used
alone to carry cargo. Otherwise,
damage to the roof or paint or a
dangerous road hazard due to
loss of cargo could result.
. When using the roof crossbar kit,
make sure that the total weight of
the crossbars, carrying attachment and cargo does not exceed
the maximum load limit. Overloading may cause damage to
the vehicle and create a safety
hazard.
! Installing carrying attachments on
the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the crossbars, follow the manufacturer’s instructions and make sure that the attachment is
securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
attachments designed specifically for the
crossbars. A set of crossbars is designed
to carry loads (cargo and attachment) of
not more than 100 lbs (45 kg). Before
operating the vehicle, make sure that the
cargo is properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting the
driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
! Removal and installation of the
crossbars
The crossbars can be removed when you
do not use the roof to carry cargo.
! To remove the crossbar
1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx®
head screw from the top of each crossbar
end support.
2. Rotate the lower clamp on the bottom
of each end support downward approximately 908.
3. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof
rails.
! To install the crossbar
Front crossbar:
Front crossbar has 100 LBS. Load Label
on left-hand side.
Driving tips 8-15
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (248,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-16 Driving tips
F: Front of vehicle
1) T30 torx® head screw
2) Front arrow label
3) Front crossbar
4) 100LBS load label
5) Lower clamp
6) Roof rail end support
7) Joint line
8) Front arrow label
a: 3 inches (76 mm)
1. Before placing the crossbar on the roof
rails, make sure that the T-30 torx® head
screw is removed from the top of each
crossbar end support.
2. Rotate the lower clamp on the bottom
of each end support downward approximately 908.
3. With the front direction arrow label on
the top right side of the crossbar pointing
toward the front of the vehicle, carefully
place the crossbar across the top of the
vehicle so that the crossbar end supports
rest on the top of the roof rails approximately 3 inches (76 mm) rearward from
the seam (joint) between the front roof rail
support and the roof rail.
4. Rotate (raise) the lower clamp up to
the bottom of the roof rail and loosely
tighten the T-30 torx® head screw with the
torx® wrench provided, through the top of
the end support and into the threaded
insert in the lower clamp on each end of
the crossbar.
NOTE
It may be necessary to squeeze the
lower clamp and the end support
together to compress the pads and
gain a better alignment of the pieces
while trying to start the screw. Use care
not to cross-thread the screw in the
insert.
5. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar
on the roof rails, and if available, use a T30 torx® bit and torque wrench and tighten
the T-30 torx® head screws to 30 to 35
lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf·m) of
torque (or tighten securely with the torx®
wrench provided).
Black plate (249,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Rear crossbar:
F: Front of vehicle
1) T30 torx® head screw
2) Front arrow label
3) Rear crossbar
4) Roof rail end support
5) Joint line
6) Front arrow label
a: 0 inch (0 mm)
Install the rear crossbar in the same
manner as the front crossbar.
NOTE
The rear crossbar should be positioned
just in front of the rear seam (joint)
between the rear roof rail support and
the roof rail.
CAUTION
Do not carry cargo on the roof when
the crossbars are removed. Luggage on the roof will be thrown
forward or backward in sudden
stops or rapid accelerations, resulting in a dangerous road hazard.
NOTE
Before each use of the roof crossbar,
make sure the four T-30 crossbar
clamp screws have been checked,
and retightened if necessary to 35 lbf·in
(4.0 N·m, 0.41 kgf·m), as outlined in
Step #5 above.
Trailer hitch (if equipped)
The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class
1 rated load. A maximum of 2,000 lbs
(906 kg) gross trailer weight and a
maximum of 200 lbs (90 kg) gross tongue
weight are permissible for the trailer hitch.
When you tow a trailer, follow the instructions in the section “Trailer towing” in this
chapter.
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal injuries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situation. Refer to the section “Trailer
towing” in this chapter for possible recommendations and limitations.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the towing load exceeds 1,000
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer
has safety chains and that each
chain will hold the trailer’s maximum gross weight. Towing trailers without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if
Driving tips 8-17
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (250,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-18 Driving tips
the trailer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
and safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer
could get loose and create a
traffic safety hazard.
. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight
distributing hitch.
& Connecting a trailer
1. Remove the receiver cover from the
hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball
mount into the hitch receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the
hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes
through the ball mount.
3. Insert the safety pin securely into the
hitch pin.
4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it
does not come off the hitch receiver.
1) Hitch ball installation point
2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate
for the ball mount and your trailer. The
hitch ball must be securely installed on the
ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight. The chains
should cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight-turn situations into
account; however, be careful not to let
them drag on the ground.
Black plate (251,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to part
of the vehicle other than the safety
chain hooks.
Hitch harness connector – Wagon
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
wire harness by individually activating the
brake, right turn signal, left turn signal,
stop, and parking lights on the trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before launching or retrieving a
watercraft.
& When you do not tow a trailer
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
onto the hitch receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch wire harness to
protect against possible damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using terminal grease.
Driving tips 8-19
8
Black plate (252,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-20 Driving tips
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
brakes, tires and suspension and has an
adverse effect on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious operation of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
purchasing a hitch and other necessary
towing equipment appropriate for your
vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the
instructions on correct installation and use
provided by the trailer and other towing
equipment manufacturers.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
& Warranties and maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused
by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to
tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance
will be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer
be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
with any new powertrain component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving.
& Maximum load limits
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load
limits explained in the following.
Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Before towing a trailer, check the
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
! Total trailer weight
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum weight shown in the following
table.
Black plate (253,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Model Conditions Maximum
total trailer
weight
MT models When towing a
trailer without
brakes.
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
When towing a
trailer with brakes.
2,000 lbs
(906 kg)
AT models When towing a
trailer without
brakes.
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
When towing a
trailer with brakes.
2,000 lbs
(906 kg)
When towing a
trailer on a long
uphill grade continuously for over
5 miles (8 km) with
an outside temperature of 1048F
(408C) or above.
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the
combined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
Certification plate
GVWR is shown on the certification plate
located on the driver’s side doorjamb of
your vehicle.
Driving tips 8-21
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (254,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-22 Driving tips
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehicle. The front and rear GAWR are also
shown on the certification plate.
Certification label
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
! Tongue load
Tongue load
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight
and does not exceed the maximum value
of 200 lbs (90 kg).
Black plate (255,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1) Jack
2) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration. When weighing the tongue load, be
sure to position the towing coupler at the
height at which it would be during actual
towing, using a jack as shown.
F: Front of vehicle
The tongue load can be adjusted by
proper distribution of the load in the trailer.
Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front; approximately
60 percent of the trailer load should be in
the front and approximately 40 percent in
the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly
as possible on both the left and right
sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced during cornering, resulting in oversteer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
& Trailer hitches
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
trailer.
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Also, drilling the frame or underbody of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
. Do not modify the vehicle exDriving tips 8-23
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (256,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-24 Driving tips
haust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a
hitch or other trailer towing
equipment.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
! WAGON including OUTBACK
SPORT
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer
hitch is recommended. A genuine
SUBARU hitch is available from your
SUBARU dealer.
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoidable, be sure the hitch is suited to your
vehicle and trailer. Consult with a professional hitch supplier to assist you in
choosing an appropriate hitch for your
vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch
manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
to handle that type of load.
For all types of hitches, regularly check
that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are
tight.
! SEDAN
SUBARU does not offer accessory trailer
hitches. Consult with a professional hitch
supplier to assist you in choosing an
appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure
to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
to handle that type of load.
Regularly check that the hitch mounting
bolts and nuts are tight.
& Connecting a trailer
! Trailer brakes
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be
equipped with its own brake system.
Electric brakes or surge brakes are
recommended, and must be installed
properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system.
Please ask your SUBARU dealer and
professional trailer supplier for more information about the trailer’s brake system.
WARNING
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Do not directly connect your
trailer’s hydraulic brake system
to the hydraulic brake system in
your vehicle. Direct connection
would cause the vehicle’s brake
performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident.
! Trailer safety chains
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains. Pass the chains crossing each
other under the trailer tongue to prevent
the trailer from dropping onto the ground
in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into account; however, be careful not
to let them drag on the ground.
For more information about the safety
chain connection, refer to the instructions
Black plate (257,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
for your hitch and trailer.
WARNING
Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing a
trailer without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
! Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
check that the standard side mirrors
provide a good rearward field of view
without significant blind spots. If significant
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s standard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations.
! Trailer lights
Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s electrical system requires modifications to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to
increase its capacity and accommodate
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights
are connected properly, please consult
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
operation of the turn signals, the brake
lights and parking lights each time you
hitch up.
CAUTION
Direct splicing or other improper
connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehicle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction of
your vehicle’s lighting system.
! Tires
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated to the pressure
specified on the tire placard located on
the left center pillar of your vehicle.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
road service to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare
tire is firmly secured.
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to
sustain the towing load. Use of the
temporary spare tire when towing
can result in failure of the spare tire
and/or less stability of the vehicle.
& Trailer towing tips
CAUTION
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when towing a trailer in hilly
country on hot days.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be different from normal operation. For
Driving tips 8-25
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (258,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-26 Driving tips
safety’s sake, you should employ
extra caution when towing a
trailer and you should never
speed. You should also keep the
following tips in mind:
! Before starting out on a trip
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-tohitch mounting are in good condition. If
any problems are apparent, do not tow the
trailer.
. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is
tipped sharply up at the front and down at
the rear, check the total trailer weight,
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
confirm that the load and its distribution
are acceptable.
. Check that the tire pressures are
correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that
– the trailer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
– the trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailer’s brake
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s
brake pedal is pressed, and that the
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is operated.
– the safety chains are connected
properly.
– all cargo in the trailer is secured
safely in position.
– the side mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a significant blind spot.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
before starting out on a trip. In an area free
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
backing up.
! Driving with a trailer
. You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
control.
. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, always start out in first gear
and release the clutch at moderate engine
revolution.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
longer than normal turning radius because
the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In
a tight turn, the trailer could hit your
vehicle.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
weather conditions or the passing of large
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
grip the steering wheel and slow down
immediately but gradually.
. When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required because of the
added weight and length caused by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
1) Left turn
2) Right turn
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and
takes practice. When backing up with a
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
When turning back, grip the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right
Black plate (259,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
for a right turn.
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer and have repairs performed
immediately by the nearest SUBARU
dealer.
! Driving on grades
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
engine braking effect and prevent overheating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
attention to the water temperature gauge
pointer (for all vehicles) and AT OIL TEMP
warning light (for AT vehicles) since the
engine and transmission are relatively
prone to overheating under these conditions. If the water temperature gauge
pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone
or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates, immediately switch off the air
conditioner and stop the vehicle at the
nearest safe place. Refer to the “Engine
overheating” section in chapter 9, and
“Warning and indicator lights” section in
chapter 3.
. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, avoid using the accelerator pedal
to stay stationary on an uphill slope
instead of using the parking brake or foot
brake. That may cause the transmission
fluid to overheat.
. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, place the selector lever as
follows:
Uphill slopes: “D” position
Downhill slopes: A low-speed gear position to use engine braking
! Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a
hill or slope cannot be avoided, you
should take the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual
transmission) or “P” (automatic transmission) and shut off the engine.
Driving tips 8-27
8
Black plate (260,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
8-28 Driving tips
STI front lip spoiler (if
equipped)
CAUTION
. Your vehicle’s ground clearance
and approach angle are decreased due to the addition of
the front lip spoiler. Please exercise caution when parking the
vehicle, driving over speed
bumps, traveling up or down
steep inclines, or when undertaking any other maneuver that
may involve the front end of the
vehicle.
. When towing a vehicle or loading
it onto a flatbed tow truck, extra
precautions must be taken to
ensure proper clearance between
the front lip spoiler and the
loading ramp or towing apparatus. Failure to allow for proper
clearance in these situations may
result in damage to the front lip
spoiler that is not covered under
warranty.
The front lip spoiler protrudes outward
approximately one half inch beyond the
standard edge of the front bumper. In
addition it decreases the ground clearance of the front bumper by approximately
2.5 inches. Extra care must be taken with
vehicles equipped with the front lip spoiler
to avoid damage to that accessory.
Black plate (17,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
If you park your vehicle in case of an
emergency ........................................................ 9-2
Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2
Flat tires............................................................... 9-4
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-4
Jump starting ...................................................... 9-8
How to jump start................................................ 9-9
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-11
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment.................................................... 9-11
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment ................................................... 9-11
Towing ................................................................ 9-11
Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-12
Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-13
Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-14
Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
unlocked.......................................................... 9-14
Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be
closed .............................................................. 9-15
Maintenance tools ............................................. 9-16
Jack and jack handle ......................................... 9-16
In case of emergency
9
Black plate (262,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
9-2 In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in
case of an emergency
The hazard warning flasher should be
used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be activated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pushing the switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Temporary spare tire
The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare tire and reinstall the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is designed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm2).
When using the temporary spare tire, note
the following.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
Black plate (263,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on
the tread, replace the tire.
. The temporary spare tire must be used
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
1) Spare fuse
2) FWD connector
NOTE
Before driving your vehicle (if your
vehicle is AWD with automatic transmission, except Turbo models) with the
temporary spare tire, put a spare fuse
inside the FWD connector in the main
fuse box located in the engine compartment and confirm that the AllWheel Drive warning light “AWD” in
the combination meter comes on. The
All-Wheel Drive capability of the vehicle has now deactivated. After reinstalling the conventional tire, remove
the spare fuse from the FWD connector
in order to reactivate All-Wheel Drive.
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to
sustain the towing load. Use of the
temporary spare tire when towing
can result in failure of the spare tire
and/or less stability of the vehicle
and may lead to an accident.
CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire
other than the original. Using other
sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
In case of emergency 9-3
9
Black plate (264,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
9-4 In case of emergency
Flat tires
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire
WARNING
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a
severe accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.
. Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out
of the jacking point due to a jolt
and this can result in a severe
accident.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and
shift a manual transmission vehicle in
reverse or an automatic transmission
vehicle in the “P” (Park) position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
Sedan
1) Jack
2) Jack handle
3) Spare tire
Black plate (265,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Wagon
1) Jack
2) Jack handle
3) Spare tire
5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and
wheel nut wrench.
The spare tire is stored under the floor of
the trunk or cargo area.
To remove the spare tire, proceed as
follows:
Sedan: Remove the floor cover from the
trunk. Turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take the spare tire out.
Wagon: Open the lid.
Remove the storage compartment (if so
equipped). Turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take spare tire out.
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle is
a temporary spare tire, carefully read the
In case of emergency 9-5
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (266,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
9-6 In case of emergency
section “Temporary spare tire” in this
chapter and strictly follow the instructions.
The jack is stored on the left side of the
trunk or cargo area.
To take out the jack:
Remove the cover, turn the jackscrew
counterclockwise to loosen it, then remove the jack.
If the jackscrew is too tight to be loosened
by hand, loosen it using a screwdriver or
the jack handle.
The jack handle is stored under the spare
tire cover.
NOTE
Make sure the jack is well lubricated
before using it.
6. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
Jack-up points (Vehicle with side sill skirt)
Black plate (267,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Jack-up points (Others)
7. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
9. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
10. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
with a cloth.
11. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
12. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
13. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
In case of emergency 9-7
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (268,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
9-8 In case of emergency
illustration.
The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to
72 lbf·ft (80 to 100 N·m, 8 to 10 kgf·m).
This torque is equivalent to applying
approximately 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg)
at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never
use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a
pipe extension on the wrench because
you may exceed the specified torque.
Have the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service facility.
14. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
compartment.
Put the spacer and tighten the attaching
bolt firmly.
Also store the jack and wheel nut wrench
in their storage locations.
After placing the jack in its storage
location, turn the jackscrew clockwise by
hand until it becomes too hard to turn.
Then, tighten it by an additional 1/4 – 1/3
of a turn using a screwdriver or the jack
handle. Unless the jack is properly secured, it may rattle while the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
Jump starting
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you,
thoroughly flush the exposed
area with water immediately. Get
medical help if the fluid has
entered your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
Black plate (269,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
eye protectors, and remove metal
objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables
in suitable condition are available.
. A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it
done incorrectly. If you are unsure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a competent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
& How to jump start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
In case of emergency 9-9
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (270,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
9-10 In case of emergency
1) Booster battery
2) Engine lifting bracket
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other
cable to the negative (−) terminal of
the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the engine lifting bracket.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
Black plate (271,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Engine overheating
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been
shut off and has fully cooled down.
When the engine is hot, the coolant
is under pressure. Removing the
cap while the engine is still hot
could release a spray of boiling hot
coolant, which could burn you very
seriously.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the
road and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
& If steam is coming from the
engine compartment
Turn off the engine and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down.
& If no steam is coming from
the engine compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine
compartment.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact your authorized
dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine.
If the temperature gauge stays at the
overheated zone, turn off the engine.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve
tank.
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
down and turning it.
Towing
If towing is necessary, it is best done by
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety.
WARNING
Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT
and MT) with the front wheels raised
off the ground while the rear wheels
are on the ground, or with the rear
wheels raised off the ground while
the front wheels are on the ground.
This will cause the vehicle to spin
away due to the operation or deterioration of the center differential.
In case of emergency 9-11
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (272,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
9-12 In case of emergency
& Towing and tie-down hooks
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
from mud, sand or snow).
Front towing hook:
1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
out of the tool bag. Take the jack handle
out of the trunk (Sedan) or cargo area
(Wagon).
2. Pry off the cover on the front bumper
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely
using the jack handle.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.
Fit the fog light cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
Rear towing hook:
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the front
bumper and the towing hook, do not
Black plate (273,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
apply excessive lateral load to the
towing hook.
Tie-down hooks:
1) Tie-down hook
2) Towing and tie-down hook
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hook. Never
use suspension parts or other
parts of the body for towing or
tie-down purposes.
. Never use the tie-down hook on
the underside of the vehicle
closest to the muffler for towing
purposes.
& Using a flat-bed truck
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the selector lever into the “P”
position for automatic transmission vehicles or “1st” for manual transmission
vehicles.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front underspoiler and rear underspoiler (both
optional), be careful not to scrape
them when placing the vehicle on
the carrier and when removing the
vehicle from the carrier.
In case of emergency 9-13
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (274,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
9-14 In case of emergency
& Towing with all wheels on the
ground
1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels and add oil to bring it to the
upper level if necessary.
2. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in neutral.
3. The ignition switch should be in the
“Acc” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position while the
vehicle is being towed because
the steering wheel and the direction of the wheels will be locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not function when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flatbed truck.
. Do not run the engine while being
towed using this method. Transmission damage could result if
the vehicle is towed with the
engine running.
. For vehicles with automatic
transmission, the traveling speed
must be limited to less than 20
mph (30 km/h) and the traveling
distance to less than 31 miles (50
km). For greater speeds and
distances, transport your vehicle
on a flat-bed truck.
Rear gate – if the rear gate
cannot be unlocked
In the event that you cannot unlock the
rear gate by operating the power door
locking switches or the remote keyless
entry system, you can unlock it from inside
the cargo area.
1. Remove the access cover at the
bottom-center of the rear gate trim.
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever
behind the rear gate trim panel.
Black plate (275,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3. Unlock the rear gate by pressing the
lever inside the trim to the left.
4. Open the rear gate from outside by
raising the rear gate handle.
Moonroof – if the moonroof
cannot be closed
If the moonroof cannot be closed with the
moonroof switch, you can close the moonroof manually.
1. Take out the hex-head wrench from
the glove compartment and screwdriver
from the tool bag.
2. Remove the map light lens by prying
the edge of the lens using a flat-head
screwdriver.
3. Remove the two screws that retain the
moonroof switch body. Then, remove the
moonroof switch.
4. Insert the wrench in the end of the
motor shaft.
To lower the moonroof, turn the wrench
clockwise.
To close the moonroof, turn the wrench
counterclockwise.
Have your vehicle checked and repaired
by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
In case of emergency 9-15
9
Black plate (276,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
9-16 In case of emergency
Maintenance tools
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools:
Wheel cover remover (only for vehicles
with wheel covers)
Screwdriver
Towing hook (eye bolt)
Wheel nut wrench
Hex-head wrench (only for vehicles
with moonroof)
& Jack and jack handle
The jack is stored on the left side of the
trunk (Sedan) or cargo area (Wagon).
To take out the jack, turn the jackscrew
counterclockwise to loosen it, then remove the jack.
Sedan
1) Jack
2) Jack handle
3) Spare tire
Black plate (277,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Wagon
1) Jack
2) Jack handle
3) Spare tire
The jack handle is stored under the spare
tire cover.
For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires”
section in this chapter.
In case of emergency 9-17
9
Black plate (19,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2
Washing............................................................. 10-2
Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4
Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5
Seat fabric......................................................... 10-5
Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, and switches .................. 10-5
Appearance care
10
Black plate (280,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
10-2 Appearance care
Exterior care
& Washing
CAUTION
. When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compartment and area adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air intake, electrical parts or the power
steering fluid reservoir, it will
cause engine trouble or faulty
power steering respectively.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with a rear wiper, automatic carwash brushes could become
tangled around it, damaging the
wiper arm and other components. Ask the automatic carwash operator not to let the
brushes touch the wiper arm or
to fix the wiper arm on the rear
window glass with adhesive tape
before operating the machine
(Wagon models only).
CAUTION
(WRX-STI)
Do not hold the roof vane such as
when washing the vehicle roof or
trying to move the vehicle. Doing so
could break the roof vane.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure
beforehand that the car wash is of
suitable type.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash
the vehicle with hot water and in direct
sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree
sap, and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required.
If you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth.
! Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
water at frequent intervals to reduce the
harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
Black plate (281,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
components may accelerate their corrosion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or
sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
the underbody. Carefully flush the suspension and axle parts, as they are particularly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do
not use a sharp-edged tool to remove
caked mud.
NOTE
Be careful not to damage brake hoses,
sensor harnesses, and other parts
when washing suspension components.
! Using a warm water washer
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continuously.
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash
by hand. Some warm water washers are
of the high temperature, high pressure
type, and they can damage or deform the
resin parts such as moldings, or cause
water to leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recommended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the
surface with a fine-grained compound.
Never polish just the affected area, but
include the surrounding area as well.
Always polish in only one direction. A
No. 2000 grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained
compound. Coarse-grained compounds
have a smaller grain-size number and
could damage the paint. After polishing
with a compound, coat with wax to restore
the original luster. Frequent polishing with
a compound or an incorrect polishing
technique will result in removing the paint
layer and exposing the undercoat. When
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
& Cleaning aluminum wheels
. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
is left on too long, it may be difficult to
clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels) with water as soon as
possible when it has been splashed with
sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or other
agents.
Appearance care 10-3
10
Black plate (282,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
10-4 Appearance care
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most common causes of
corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust
control chemicals, or used in coastal
areas where there is more salt in the air,
or in areas where there is considerable
industrial pollution.
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
3. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry.
4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which cannot
dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
& To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces:
. roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. mud, sand, or gravel
. coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
of maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to
make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
latch should be inspected and lubricated
periodically.
Black plate (283,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Cleaning the interior
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
& Seat fabric
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe
using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.
Use the cleaner according to its instructions.
NOTE
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials.
& Leather seat materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber
cloth should be performed monthly, taking
care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
woolen fabrics may be used to remove
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
may be treated with a commercial leather
spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
genuine leather.
& Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
NOTE
Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window cleaner
or gasoline must never be used on
leather or synthetic interior materials.
& Climate control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel,
console panel, and switches
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches.
NOTE
Do not use organic solvents such as
paint thinners or gasoline, or strong
cleaning agents that contain those
solvents.
Appearance care 10-5
10
Black plate (21,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3
Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3
Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment.................................................... 11-4
When you do checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-4
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-4
Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-6
Non-turbo models .............................................. 11-6
Turbo models..................................................... 11-7
Engine oil............................................................ 11-8
Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-8
Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 11-9
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-11
Recommended grade and viscosity under severe
driving conditions .......................................... 11-12
Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-12
Cooling system ................................................ 11-12
Cooling fan, hose and connections................... 11-12
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-13
Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-15
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-15
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-17
Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-18
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-18
Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-19
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-19
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-20
Automatic transmission fluid .......................... 11-20
Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-20
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-21
Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles).......... 11-21
Checking the oil level ...................................... 11-21
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-22
Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-22
Checking the gear oil level............................... 11-22
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-23
Power steering fluid ........................................ 11-24
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-24
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-25
Brake fluid........................................................ 11-25
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-25
Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-26
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) ............................... 11-26
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-26
Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-27
Brake booster .................................................. 11-27
Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-27
Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-27
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-28
Clutch pedal (MT vehicles).............................. 11-28
Checking the clutch function............................ 11-28
Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-28
Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-29
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-29
Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-30
Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-30
Types of tires................................................... 11-30
Tire inspection................................................. 11-30
Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-31
Maintenance and service
11
Black plate (22,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Maintenance and service
Wheel balance.................................................. 11-33
Wear indicators ................................................ 11-33
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-33
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-34
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-34
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-35
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-35
Intercooler water spray (WRX-STI).................. 11-36
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-36
Replacement of wiper blades.......................... 11-38
Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-38
Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-38
Rear window wiper blade assembly .................. 11-39
Rear window wiper blade rubber....................... 11-40
Battery............................................................... 11-41
Fuses................................................................ 11-42
Main fuse.......................................................... 11-44
Installation of accessories .............................. 11-44
Replacing bulbs............................................... 11-45
Headlights (WRX-STI)....................................... 11-46
Headlights (Except WRX-STI) ........................... 11-47
Front turn signal light bulbs............................. 11-49
Parking light .................................................... 11-49
Front fog light.................................................. 11-49
Rear combination lights ................................... 11-49
License plate light ........................................... 11-51
Dome light, map light and cargo area light ....... 11-51
Trunk light ....................................................... 11-52
High mount stop light ...................................... 11-52
Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-53
Black plate (287,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Maintenance schedule
The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the separate “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service
by yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this
section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive
vehicle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel
dynamometer or similar apparatus. Attempting to do so will
result in transmission damage
and in uncontrolled vehicle
movement and may cause an
accident or injuries to persons
nearby.
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experienced in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
. Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always use
a safety stands to support the
vehicle.
. Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as
a garage or other closed areas.
. Do not smoke or allow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
by your SUBARU dealer.
. Wear adequate eye protection to
Maintenance and service 11-3
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (288,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-4 Maintenance and service
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the
system or it can render it inoperative. The wiring and connectors of these systems are yellow
for easy identification. NEVER
use a circuit tester for these
wiring.
If your SRS airbag or seatbelt
pretensioner needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.
& Before checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and set
the parking brake firmly to prevent the vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after
the engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. Always remove the key from the
ignition switch. When the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position,
the cooling fan may operate
suddenly even when the engine
is stopped.
& When you do checking or
servicing in the engine compartment while the engine is
running
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, belts and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
Engine hood
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
positions.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
Black plate (289,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3. Release the secondary hood release
by moving the lever between the front
grille and the hood toward the left.
Lift up the hood, release the hood prop
from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood until it approaches
approximately 12 in (30 cm) from the
closed position and let it drop.
After closing the hood, be sure the hood is
securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position. Do not push
the hood forcibly to close it. It could
deform the metal.
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily injury.
Maintenance and service 11-5
11
Black plate (290,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-6 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment overview
& Non-turbo models
1) Air cleaner element (page 11-15)
2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)
(page 11-19) or Differential gear oil level
gauge (AT) (page 11-21)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26)
4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-20)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25)
6) Fuse box (page 11-42)
7) Battery (page 11-41)
8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-36)
9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-13)
10) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)
11) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)
12) Radiator cap (page 11-13)
13) Power steering fluid reservoir (page 1124)
Black plate (291,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Turbo models 1) Air cleaner element (page 11-15)
2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)
(page 11-19) or Differential gear oil level
gauge (AT) (page 11-21)
3) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-20)
4) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25)
6) Fuse box (page 11-42)
7) Battery (page 11-41)
8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-36)
9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)
10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-13)
11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)
12) Radiator cap (page 11-13)
13) Power steering fluid reservoir (page 1124)
Maintenance and service 11-7
11
Black plate (292,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 20
11-8 Maintenance and service
Engine oil
NOTE
. The engine oil consumption rate is
not stabilized, and therefore cannot be
determined until the vehicle has traveled at least several thousand miles
(kilometers). Even after break-in, when
the vehicle is used under severe driving conditions such as those mentioned in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet, engine oil is consumed
or deteriorated more quickly than under normal driving conditions. If you
drive your vehicle under these severe
conditions, you should check the oil
level at least at every second fuel fill-up
time, and change the oil more frequently. Please refer to the Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet for more details.
. If the oil consumption rate seems
abnormally high after the break-in
period, for example more than 1 quart
per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000
kilometers, we recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level at each fuel
stop.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
insert it again.
3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly inserted until it stops with the graphic
symbol on its top appearing as
shown in the illustration.
1) Notch
2) Upper level
3) Lower level
4. Pull out the dipstick again and check
the oil level on it. If it is below the lower
level, add oil to bring the level up to the
upper level.
CAUTION
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and viscosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
Black plate (293,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
If you check the oil level just after stopping
the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to
drain back into the oil pan before checking
the level.
Just after driving or while the engine is
warm, the engine oil level reading may be
in a range between the upper level and
the notch mark. This is caused by thermal
expansion of the engine oil.
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not
add any additional oil above the upper
level when the engine is cold.
& Changing the oil and oil filter
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be
changed more frequently than listed in
the maintenance schedule when driving
on dusty roads, when short trips are
frequently made, or when driving in
extremely cold weather.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the
engine idle for approximately 10 minutes
to ease draining the engine oil.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
Turbo models
Non-turbo models
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
the drain plug while the engine is still
warm. The used oil should be drained into
an appropriate container and disposed of
properly.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself with
hot engine oil.
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain
plug with a clean cloth and tighten it
securely with a new sealing washer after
the oil has completely drained out.
6. Remove the under cover.
Turbo models
Maintenance and service 11-9
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (294,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-10 Maintenance and service
Non-turbo models
7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench.
8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a
thin coat of engine oil to the seal.
9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of
the bottom of engine and install the oil
filter by hand turning. Be careful not to
twist or damage the seal.
10. Tighten the oil filter by the amount
indicated in the following table after the
seal makes contact with the bottom of
engine.
Oil filter color Part number Amount ofrotation
Black 15208AA100 1 rotation
White 15208AA09A 2/3 – 3/4rotation
CAUTION
. Never over tighten the oil filter
because that can result in an oil
leak.
. Thoroughly wipe off any engine
oil that has spilled over the
exhaust pipe and/or under-cover.
If spilled oil is not promptly
wiped up, the oil could cause a
fire.
11. Reinstall under cover.
12. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
Oil capacity (guideline):
4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
The oil quantity indicated above is only
guideline.
The necessary quantity of oil depends on
the quantity of oil that has been drained.
The quantity of drained oil differs slightly
depending on the temperature of the oil
and the time the oil is left flowing out. After
refilling the engine with oil, therefore, you
must use the dipstick to confirm that the
level is correct.
13. Start the engine and make sure that no
oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber
seal and drain plug.
14. Run the engine until it reaches the
normal operating temperature. Then stop
the engine and wait a few minutes to allow
the oil drain back. Check the oil level
again and if necessary, add more engine
oil.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
Black plate (295,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Oil grade:
ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with
the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst
mark)
or API classification SM with the words
“ENERGY CONSERVING”
These recommended oil grades can be
identified by looking for either or both of
the following marks displayed on the oil
container.
API Service label
1) Indicates the oil quality by API designations
2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade
3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving
capabilities
ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)
In choosing an oil, you want the proper
quality and viscosity, as well as one that
will add to fuel economy. The following
table lists the recommended viscosities
and applicable temperatures.
When adding oil, different brands may be
used together as long as they are the
same API classification and SAE viscosity
as those recommended by SUBARU.
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
*: 5W-30 is preferred.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel
economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide
better fuel economy. However, in hot
weather, oil of higher viscosity is required
to properly lubricate the engine.
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
Maintenance and service 11-11
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (296,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-12 Maintenance and service
& Recommended grade and
viscosity under severe driving conditions
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in
areas with very high temperatures, or
used for heavy-duty applications such as
towing a trailer, use of oil with the following
grade and viscosities is recommended.
API classification SM (or SL):
SAE viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W-50,
20W-40, 20W-50
& Synthetic oil
You can use synthetic engine oil that
meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual, and must follow
the oil and filter changing intervals shown
in the maintenance schedule.
Cooling system
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
CAUTION
. The cooling system has been
filled at the factory with a high
quality, corrosion-inhibiting,
year-around coolant which provides protection against freezing
down to −338F (−368C). For adding, use genuine SUBARU coolant or an equivalent: a mixture of
50% soft water (or clear and
drinkable water) and 50% phosphate or non-amine type coolant.
Use of improper coolants may
result in corrosion in the cooling
system. It is important to maintain protection against freezing
and corrosion, even if freezing
temperatures are not expected.
Never mix different kinds of coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
& Cooling fan, hose and connections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the engine coolant temperature gauge exceeds the normal operating
range, the cooling fan circuit may be
defective. Check the fuse and replace it
if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have
the cooling system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may be a leak in the engine
cooling system. It is recommended that
the cooling system and connections be
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
Black plate (297,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Engine coolant
! Checking the coolant level
1) “FULL” level mark
2) “LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
as required.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the caps and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
! Changing the coolant
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
Always add genuine Subaru cooling system conditioner whenever the coolant is
replaced.
Change the engine coolant and add
genuine Subaru cooling system conditioner using the following procedures
Maintenance and service 11-13
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (298,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-14 Maintenance and service
according to the maintenance schedule.
1. Remove the under cover.
2. Place a proper container under the
drain plug and loosen the drain plug.
3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the
coolant from the radiator. Then drain the
coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the
drain plug securely.
NOTE (Turbo model only)
The cap (without tabs) on top of the
radiator does not need to be removed.
To add coolant, remove the cap (with
tabs) on the coolant tank on top of the
engine.
4. Install the under cover.
Non-turbo models
1) Filler neck
2) Fill up to this level
Turbo models
1) Filler neck
2) Fill up to this level
5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to
just below the filler neck, allowing enough
room to add genuine Subaru cooling
system conditioner in the radiator. Add
genuine Subaru cooling system conditioner until the coolant level reaches the
filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too
quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air
bleeding and trapped air in the system.
Guideline of coolant quantity (including
coolant in reservoir tank):
Non-turbo models:
MT: 7.4 US qt (7.0 liters, 6.2 Imp qt)
AT: 7.3 US qt (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt)
Turbo models:
MT: 8.1 US qt (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp qt)
AT: 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)
1) “FULL” level mark
2) “LOW” level mark
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
Black plate (299,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir tank’s “FULL” level mark.
1) Rubber gaskets
7. Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten firmly. At this time, make sure that
the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is
correctly in place.
8. Start and run the engine for more than
five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.
9. Stop the engine and wait until the
coolant cools down (122 to 1408F [50 to
608C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add
coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and to
the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.
10. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap
back on and tighten firmly.
Air cleaner element
The air cleaner element functions as a
filter screen. When the element is perforated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a viscous type.
It is unnecessary to clean or wash the
element.
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
& Replacing the air cleaner
element
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
Maintenance and service 11-15
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (300,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-16 Maintenance and service
! Turbo models
1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air
cleaner case cover.
2. Open the air cleaner case cover and
remove the air cleaner element.
3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner
cover and case with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
4. To install the air cleaner case cover,
insert the two projections on the air
cleaner case cover into the slits on the
air cleaner case and then snap the two
clamps on the air cleaner case cover.
! Non-turbo models
1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air
cleaner case cover.
2. Push the air cleaner case cover in the
direction of the arrow shown in the
drawing.
Black plate (301,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1) Air cleaner case cover
2) Air cleaner element
3. Open the air cleaner case cover and
remove the air cleaner element.
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner
cover and case with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
5. To install the air cleaner case cover,
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case into the slits on the air
cleaner case cover and then snap the
two clamps on the air cleaner case cover.
Spark plugs
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have
the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
CAUTION
. When disconnecting the spark
plug cables, always grasp the
spark plug cap, not the cables.
. Make sure the cables are replaced in the correct order.
Maintenance and service 11-17
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (302,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-18 Maintenance and service
& Recommended spark plugs
Non-turbo models:
FR5AP-11 (NGK)
Turbo models:
ILFR6B (NGK)
Drive belts
1) Power steering pump pulley
2) Air conditioner compressor pulley
3) Crank pulley
The alternator, power steering pump, and
air conditioner compressor depend on
drive belts. Satisfactory performance requires that belt tension be correct.
To check belt tension, place a straightedge (ruler) across two adjacent pulleys
and apply a force of 22 lbs (98 N, 10 kg)
midway between the pulleys by using a
spring scale. Belt deflection should be the
amount specified. If a belt is loose,
cracked, or worn, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
in (mm)
Deflection
New belt Used belt
A
0.28 – 0.35
(7.0 – 9.0)
0.35 – 0.43
(9.0 – 11.0)
B
0.30 – 0.33
(7.5 – 8.5)
0.35 – 0.40
(9.0 – 10.0)
Black plate (303,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Manual transmission oil
& Checking the oil level
5-speed transmission (Non-turbo model)
1) Yellow handle
5-speed transmission (Turbo model)
6-speed transmission
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
insert it again.
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check
the oil level on it. If it is below the lower
level, add oil through the dipstick hole to
bring the level up to the upper level.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill manual transmission oil when adding it. If oil
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
Maintenance and service 11-19
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (304,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-20 Maintenance and service
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together.
Oil grade:
API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
Automatic transmission fluid
& Checking the fluid level
The automatic transmission fluid expands
largely as its temperature rises; the fluid
level differs according to fluid temperature.
Therefore, there are two different scales
for checking the level of hot fluid and cold
fluid on the dipstick.
Though the fluid level can be checked
without warming up the fluid on the
“COLD” range, we recommend checking
the fluid level when the fluid is at operating
temperature.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is hot
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise
the temperature of the transmission fluid
up to normal operating temperature; 158
to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
set the parking brake.
3. First shift the selector lever in each
position. Then shift it in the “P” position,
and run the engine at idling speed.
1) Yellow handle
1) HOT range
2) COLD range
3) Upper level
4) Lower level
Black plate (305,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid
level on the gauge. If it is below the lower
level on the “HOT” range, add the recommended automatic transmission fluid up to
the upper level.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked
without time to warm up the automatic
transmission, check to see that the fluid
level is between the lower level and upper
level on the “COLD” range. If it is below
that range, add fluid up to the upper level.
Be careful not to overfill.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill automatic
transmission fluid when adding it.
If automatic transmission fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If automatic transmission fluid
gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to
wipe it off.
& Recommended fluid
Use one of the following types of automatic transmission fluid.
Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmission Fruid Type-HP
IDEMITSU ATF HP
Castrol Transmax J
Pennzoil ATF-J*
* Available only in the USA (except
Alaska and Hawaii)
NOTE
For optimum transmission performance, only use the automatic transmission fluid that is recommended and
provided by Subaru.
If the recommended automatic transmission fluid is unavailable, Dexron III
may be temporarily used. If the Dexron
III is used continuously there will be a
noticeable increase in the vibration and
noise from the automatic transmission.
Front differential gear oil (AT
vehicles)
& Checking the oil level
1) Yellow handle
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
insert it again.
Maintenance and service 11-21
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (306,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-22 Maintenance and service
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check
the oil level on it. If it is below the lower
level, add oil to bring the level up to the
upper level.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill front differential gear oil when adding it. If oil
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together.
Oil grade:
API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
Rear differential gear oil
& Checking the gear oil level
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear
differential protector. The differential protector provides protection to the rear
differential assembly during off-road use.
Removal of the rear differential protector is
not required when checking the oil level.
1) Filler plug
2) Drain plug
Black plate (307,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1) Filler hole
2) Drain hole
3) Oil level
Remove the plug from the filler hole and
check the oil level. The oil level should be
kept even with the bottom of the filler hole.
If the oil level is below the bottom edge of
the hole, add oil through the filler hole to
raise the level.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill rear differential gear oil when adding it. If
rear differential gear oil touches
the exhaust pipe, it may cause a
bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
rear differential gear oil gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be an oil leak.
If you suspect a problem, have
the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together.
Oil grade:
API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
Maintenance and service 11-23
11
Black plate (308,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-24 Maintenance and service
Power steering fluid
& Checking the fluid level
1) Reservoir tank
The power steering fluid expands greatly
as its temperature rises; the fluid level
differs according to fluid temperature.
Therefore, the reservoir tank has two
different checking ranges for hot and cold
fluids.
Check the power steering fluid level
monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,
and stop the engine.
1) Specified range
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir
tank.
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has
been run: Check that the oil level is
between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on
the surface of the reservoir tank.
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is
run: Check that the oil level is between
“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the
surface of the reservoir tank.
3. If the fluid level is lower than the
applicable “MIN” line, add the recommended fluid as necessary to bring the
level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
If the fluid level is extremely low, it may
indicate possible leakage. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself
because the fluid may be hot.
CAUTION
. When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
. Avoid spilling fluid when adding
it in the tank.
. Be careful not to spill power
steering fluid when adding it. If
power steering fluid touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
power steering fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
Black plate (309,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Recommended fluid
Use one of the following types of automatic transmission fluid.
“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmission Fluid Type-HP
Brake fluid
& Checking the fluid level
1) “MAX” level mark
2) “MIN” level mark
Check the fluid level monthly.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add
the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed
container.
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. Never use different brands of
brake fluid together. Also, avoid
mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake
fluids even if they are of the same
brand.
. When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
Maintenance and service 11-25
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (310,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-26 Maintenance and service
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
& Recommended brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles)
& Checking the fluid level
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level
mark, add the recommended clutch fluid
to “MAX” level mark.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
container.
WARNING
Never let clutch fluid contact your
eyes because clutch fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
advisable.
CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
. Never use different brands of
clutch fluid together.
. When clutch fluid is added, be
careful not to allow any dirt into
the tank.
. Never splash the clutch fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the clutch
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
when adding it. If clutch fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
Black plate (311,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Recommended clutch fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
CAUTION
Avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4
brake fluids even if they are of the
same brand.
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as
described in the following, have it checked
by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake
pedal several times, applying the same
pedal force each time. The distance the
pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine. The pedal should move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately one minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal
free play
1) 0.04 – 0.12 in (1.0 – 3.0 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the
brake pedal several times. Lightly press
the brake pedal down with one finger to
check the free play with a force of less
than 2 lbs (10 N, 1 kg).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Maintenance and service 11-27
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (312,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-28 Maintenance and service
& Checking the brake pedal
reserve distance
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 66 lbs (294 N, 30 kg) and measure
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, contact with your
SUBARU dealer.
Clutch pedal (MT vehicles)
Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the clutch function
Check the clutch engagement and disengagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
slowly to check that the engine and
transmission smoothly couple without
any sign of slippage.
& Checking the clutch pedal
free play
1) 0.16 – 0.51 in (4.0 – 13.0 mm)
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with
your finger until you feel resistance, and
check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (313,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Replacement of brake pad
and lining
The right front disc brake and the right rear
disc brake have audible wear indicators
on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear
close to their service limit, the wear
indicator makes a very audible scraping
noise when the brake pedal is applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
brake pad wear indicator, it will
result in the need for costly brake
rotor repair or replacement.
& Breaking-in of new brake
pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
replacement, the new parts must be
broken in as follows:
! Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times.
! Parking brake lining
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
2. With the parking brake release button
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever
SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a
force of approximately 33 lbs [147 N, 15
kg].)
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately
220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
brake to cool down. Repeat this procedure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
parking brake stroke is out of the specified
range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut
located on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke:
7 – 8 notches / 44 lbs (196 N, 20 kg)
WARNING
A safe location and situation should
be selected for break-in driving.
CAUTION
Pulling the parking brake lever too
forcefully may cause the rear
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be
certain to pull the lever up slowly
and gently.
Maintenance and service 11-29
11
Black plate (314,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-30 Maintenance and service
Parking brake stroke
Check the parking brake stroke according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
When the parking brake is properly
adjusted, braking power is fully applied
by pulling the lever up seven to eight
notches gently but firmly (approximately
44 lbs [196 N, 20 kg]). If the parking brake
lever stroke is not within the specified
range, have the brake system checked
and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
Tires and wheels
& Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
The factory-fitted 17-inch tires on the
WRX-STI are summer tires. The factoryfitted tires on other versions are all-season
tires.
! All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide
an adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snowcovered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
! Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires are
free from serious damage, nails, and
stones. At the same time, check the tires
for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires strike
curbs or are subjected to harsh treatment as when the vehicle is driven on a
rough surface, they can suffer damage
that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
This type of damage does not become
evident until time has passed. Try not
to drive over curbs, potholes or on
other rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
down to a walking pace or less, and
approach the curbs as squarely as
Black plate (315,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
possible. Also, make sure the tires are
not pressed against the curb when you
park the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration while
driving or find it difficult to steer the
vehicle in a straight line, one of the
tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
Drive slowly to the nearest authorized
SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle
inspected.
& Tire pressures and wear
Maintaining the correct tire pressures
helps to maximize the tires’ service lives
and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month (for example,
during a fuel stop) and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressures when the tires
are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
the tire pressures to the values shown on
the tire placard. The tire placard is located
on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
it expands, causing the tire pressure to
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire increases
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
three hours or has been driven less
than one mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and ride comfort, and they
cause the tires to wear abnormally.
Maintenance and service 11-31
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (316,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-32 Maintenance and service
. Correct tire pressure (tread worn
evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steering is
responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so
fuel consumption is also lower.
. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
worn at shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread
worn in center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
magnifies the effects of road-surface
bumps and dips, possibly resulting in
vehicle damage.
If the tire placard shows tire pressures for
the vehicle when fully loaded and for the
vehicle when towing a trailer, adjust the
tire pressures to the values that match
current loading conditions.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause
Black plate (317,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
& Wheel balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you suspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, have them checked
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation.
NOTE
Loss of correct wheel alignment*
causes the tires to wear on one side
and reduces the vehicle’s running
stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer
if you notice abnormal tire wear.
*: The suspension system is designed to hold
each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to
the other wheels and to the road) for optimum
straight-line stability and cornering performance.
& Wear indicators
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible when
the depth of the tread grooves decreases
to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
appears as a solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indicator
becomes visible, the tire is worn
beyond the acceptable limit and
must be replaced immediately. With
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their tread
wear indicators become visible.
& Tire rotation direction mark
Example of tire rotation direction mark
1) Front
If the tire has the rotation direction
specification, the tire rotation direction
mark is placed on its sidewall.
Maintenance and service 11-33
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (318,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-34 Maintenance and service
When you install a tire that has the tire
rotation direction mark, install the tire with
the direction mark facing forward.
& Tire rotation
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires
1) Front
Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirectional tires
1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To
maximize the life of each tire and ensure
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to
rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500
km). Move the tires to the positions shown
in the illustration each time they are
rotated.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn
tires at the time of rotation. After tire
rotation, adjust the tires pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles
(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again
and retighten any nut that has become
loose.
& Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design;
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
tires fitted as standard equipment are
optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire placard and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
those shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropriately changes the vehicle’s ground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equipment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
Black plate (319,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
recommends replacing all four tires at the
same time.
WARNING
. All four tires must be the same in
terms of manufacturer, brand
(tread pattern), construction, degree of wear, speed symbol, load
index and size. Mixing tires of
different types, sizes or degrees
of wear can result in damage to
vehicle’s powertrain. Use of different types or sizes of tires can
also dangerously reduce controllability and braking performance and can lead to an accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously reduce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
& Wheel replacement
When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equipment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper operation and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing during turns. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
NOTE
When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to
change a flat tire, always check the
tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km).
If any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
Aluminum wheels
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat tire, always check the tightness of
the wheel nuts after driving approximately
600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly
and completely around the tire, otherwise
the chains may scratch the wheel.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for aluminum wheels.
Maintenance and service 11-35
11
Black plate (320,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-36 Maintenance and service
Intercooler water spray
(WRX-STI)
Add water to the intercooler water spray
tank when the intercooler water spray
warning light in the combination meter
comes on. The warning light comes on
when the water in the tank has decreased
to approximately 0.4 liters (0.4 US qt, 0.4
Imp qt).
The tank is located on the right-hand side
of the trunk.
NOTE
. Use only pure water for refilling.
. In cold weather (when you do not
use the intercooler water spray), keep
the tank half-empty in case the water
freezes. A larger amount of water could
break the tank if it froze.
Windshield washer fluid
If you spray washer fluid on the windshield
but the supply of washer fluid appears to
diminish, check the level of washer fluid in
the tank.
Black plate (321,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Washer fluid level gauge
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
check the fluid level indicated by the level
gauge (attached to the inside of the cap).
If the level is near the “Low” mark, add
fluid until it reaches the “Hi” level on the
level gauge or the “FULL” mark on the
tank.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter,
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid
Concentration
Freezing
Temperature
30% 10.48F (−128C)
50% −48F (−208C)
100% −498F (−458C)
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside
temperature. If the concentration is
inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid
may freeze on the windshield and
obstruct your view, and the fluid
may freeze in the reservoir tank.
Maintenance and service 11-37
11
Black plate (322,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-38 Maintenance and service
Replacement of wiper blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
the windshield or the wiper blade results in
jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the
outer surface of the windshield (or rear
window) and the wiper blades using a
sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
blades with clean water. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
the windshield with water.
CAUTION
Do not clean the wiper blades with
gasoline or a solvent, such as paint
thinner or benzene. This will cause
deterioration of the wiper blades.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following procedures:
& Windshield wiper blade assembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
1) Stopper
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
holding its pivot area and pushing it in the
direction shown by the arrow while depressing the wiper blade stopper.
3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
& Windshield wiper blade rubber
1) Metal support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
metal support.
Black plate (323,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
3. Align the claws of the metal support
with the grooves in the rubber and slide
the blade rubber assembly into the metal
support until it locks.
1) Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the
end of the metal support between the
stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the
rubber is not retained properly, the wiper
blade may scratch the windshield.
& Rear window wiper blade
assembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.
Maintenance and service 11-39
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (324,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-40 Maintenance and service
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
you to remove it from the wiper arm.
& Rear window wiper blade
rubber
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
the plastic support.
1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
4. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
Black plate (325,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Securely retain both ends of the rubber
with the stoppers on the plastic support
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Battery
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean
over a battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention immediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact
with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short circuit will result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a wellventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.
Maintenance and service 11-41
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (326,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-42 Maintenance and service
1) Cap
2) Upper level
3) Lower level
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
However, if the battery fluid level is below
the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
upper level with distilled water.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the coin tray on the driver’s seat
side.
To remove the coin tray, open the cover
and pull the coin tray out.
The other one is housed in the engine
compartment.
Black plate (327,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
The spare fuses are stored in the main
fuse box cover in the engine compartment.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.
1) Good
2) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect the
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,
replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and turn off all electrical accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
The back side of each fuse box cover and
the “Fuses and circuits” section in chapter
12 in this manual show the circuit for each
fuse.
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Maintenance and service 11-43
11
Black plate (328,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-44 Maintenance and service
Main fuse
Main fuse box
The main fuses are designed to melt
during an overload to prevent damage to
the wiring harness and electrical equipment. Check the main fuses if any
electrical component fails to operate (except the starter motor) and other fuses are
good. A melted main fuse must be
replaced. Use only replacements with the
same specified rating as the melted main
fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is
replaced, have the electrical system
checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle.
Black plate (329,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Replacing bulbs
Maintenance and service 11-45
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (330,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-46 Maintenance and service
Wattage Bulb No.
1) Parking light 12V-5W 168
2) Front turn signal light 12V-21W (Amber) –
3) Front side marker light 12V-5W 168
4) Map light 12V-8W –
5) Dome light 12V-8W –
6) High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)
7) Front fog light 12V-55W H3
8) Low beam headlight
WRX-STI 12V-35W D2S
Except WRX-STI 12V-55W H7
9) Trunk room light 12V-5W –
10) High mount stop light
Sedan
(in compartment) 12V-21W –
(in rear spoiler) 12V-1.2W –
Wagon 12V-13W 912
11) Brake/tail light 12V-21/5W 7443
12) Tail light 12V-21/5W 7443
13) Rear turn signal light 12V-21W (Amber) –
14) Backup light 12V-21W 7440
15) License plate light 12V-5W 168
16) Cargo area light 12V-5W –
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
& Headlights (WRX-STI)
WARNING
High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs
are used for the low beams of the
headlights on the WRX-STI. These
HID bulbs use an extremely high
voltage. To avoid the risk of an
electric shock and resulting serious
injury, you should not attempt to
replace them. Neither should you
attempt to replace the high-beam
bulbs, remove/refit the headlight
assemblies, or remove any headlight-assembly components. For replacement of the headlight bulbs
(low-beam and high-beam), removal
and installation of the headlight
assemblies, and removal of headlight-assembly components, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (331,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Headlights (Except WRX-STI)
Before replacing the left-hand (batteryside) high-beam light bulb, remove the
screw that retains the windshield washer
nozzle and tip the windshield washer
nozzle sideways.
Non-turbo models
Turbo models
Before replacing the right-hand low- or
high-beam light bulb, remove the bolts
and remove the air intake duct.
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, finger prints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots and cause
the bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, consult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
Maintenance and service 11-47
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (332,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-48 Maintenance and service
! Right-hand low beam light bulb
1. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it
counterclockwise.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the retainer spring.
4. Replace the bulb with a new one.
5. Set the retainer spring securely.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Install the bulb cover.
! Left-hand low beam light bulb
WARNING
Replacement of the left-hand low
beam light bulb requires removal of
the battery and is thus dangerous. It
must be performed by a SUBARU
dealer.
! High beam light bulbs
1. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb.
2. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
Black plate (333,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
3. Replace the bulb with a new one.
4. Reconnect the electrical connector. At
this time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
5. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
& Front turn signal light bulbs
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have your SUBARU dealer replace the
bulbs if necessary.
& Parking light
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have your SUBARU dealer replace the
bulbs if necessary.
& Front fog light
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have your SUBARU dealer replace the
bulbs if necessary.
& Rear combination lights
! Sedan
1. Remove the clip from the rear trunk
trim with a screwdriver.
1) Tail light
2) Brake/tail light
3) Rear turn signal light
4) Backup light
2. Open the rear portion of the side trunk
trim panel.
3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
6. Secure the rear trunk trim panel with
the clips.
Maintenance and service 11-49
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (334,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-50 Maintenance and service
! Wagon
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove
the upper and lower clips that secure the
side cover of the rear combination light
assembly.
2. Remove the side cover.
3. Remove the upper and lower bolts.
Then, slide the rear combination lamp
assembly to the rear and remove it from
the vehicle.
1) Brake/tail light
2) Rear turn signal light
3) Backup light
4. Remove the bulb socket from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
6. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
Black plate (335,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
7. Put the rear combination light assembly into place while aligning the clip with
the guide on the vehicle and fasten the
bolts.
8. Install the side cover and secure it with
the clips.
& License plate light
1. Remove the mounting screws using a
Phillips screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a
new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
5. Tighten the mounting screws.
& Dome light, map light and
cargo area light
Maintenance and service 11-51
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (336,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
11-52 Maintenance and service
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a
new bulb.
3. Reinstall the lens.
& Trunk light
1. Remove the cover by squeezing its
sides and pulling it.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a
new bulb.
3. Reinstall the cover.
& High mount stop light
! Sedan
1. Remove the high mount stop light
cover by prying the edge with a screwdriver.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the high
mount stop light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a
new bulb.
4. Reinstall the cover.
Black plate (337,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
! Wagon
1. Remove the mounting screws using a
Phillips screwdriver and then remove the
high mount stop light cover.
2. Remove the bulbs from the socket by
pulling them up. Install a new bulb.
3. Reinstall the cover.
4. Tighten the mounting screws.
& Other bulbs
Other bulbs may be difficult to replace.
Have your SUBARU dealer replace
these bulbs if necessary.
Maintenance and service 11-53
11
Black plate (23,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Specifications..................................................... 12-2
Dimensions........................................................ 12-2
Engine ............................................................... 12-3
Electrical system................................................ 12-3
Capacities.......................................................... 12-4
Tires .................................................................. 12-5
Wheel alignment ................................................ 12-5
Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-6
Fuse panel located behind the coin tray ............. 12-6
Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment ................................................... 12-8
Bulb chart........................................................... 12-9
Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-11
Specifications
12
Black plate (340,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Item Sedan Wagon
2.5-liter
non-turbo
2.5-liter turbo 2.5-liter non-turbo 2.5-liter turbo
2.5i WRX WRX-STI 2.5i OUTBACK
SPORT
WRX
Drive system AWD
Transmission type AT MT AT MT AT MT AT MT AT MT
Overall length 175.8 (4,465)
Overall width Sedan 68.5 (1,740) –
Wagon – 66.7 (1,695) 67.3 (1,710) 66.7 (1,695)
Overall height Without roofrail 56.7 (1,440) 56.3 (1,430) 57.7 (1,465) 58.1 (1,475) 57.7 (1,465)
With roofrail – 58.5 (1,485) 58.9 (1,495) 58.5 (1,485)
Wheel base 99.4 (2,525)
Tread Front 58.5 (1,485) 58.7 (1,490) 57.7 (1,465) 57.5 (1,460) 57.7 (1,465)
Rear 58.1 (1,475) 58.3 (1,480) 58.9 (1,495) 57.3 (1,455)
Ground clearance*1 6.3 (160) 5.7 (145) 6.3 (160) 6.7 (170) 6.3 (160)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty
AT: Automatic transmission
MT: Manual transmission
Black plate (341,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Engine
Engine model EJ253
(2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo)
EJ255
(2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo, WRX)
EJ257
(2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo, WRX-STI)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,457 (150)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.9 6 3.1 (99.5 6 79.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1 8.2 : 1
Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4
& Electrical system
Battery type and capacity (5HR) MT 12V-48AH (55D23L)
AT 12V-52AH (75D23L)
Alternator Non-turbo models 12V-90A
Turbo models 12V-110A
Spark plugs
Non-turbo engine FR5AP-11 (NGK)
Turbo engine ILFR6B (NGK)
AT: Automatic transmission
MT: Manual transmission
Specifications 12-3
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (342,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
12-4 Specifications
& Capacities
Fuel tank 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
Transmission oil (MT) 5-speed 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)
6-speed 4.3 US qt (4.1 liters, 3.6 Imp qt)
Front differential gear oil (AT) 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
Rear differential gear oil WRX-STI 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9 Imp qt)
Others 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Transmission fluid (AT) 10.0 US qt (9.5 liters, 8.4 Imp qt)
Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
Engine coolant Non-turbo engine MT 7.4 US qt (7.0 liters, 6.2 Imp qt)
AT 7.3 US qt (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt)
Turbo engine MT 8.1 US qt (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp qt)
AT 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)
AT: Automatic transmission
MT: Manual transmission
Black plate (343,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Tires
Tire size P205/55R16 89V 215/45R17 91W 225/45R17 90W
Wheel size 16 6 61/2 JJ 17 6 7 JJ 17 6 8 JJ
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
Rear 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2)
Temporary
spare tire
Size T135/70 D16 T135/70 D17
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
& Wheel alignment
Item Sedan Wagon
2.5-liter non-turbo 2.5-liter turbo 2.5-liter non-turbo 2.5-liter turbo
2.5i WRX WRX-STI 2.5i OUTBACK
SPORT
WRX
Drive system AWD
Toe Front 0 in (0 mm)
Rear 0 in (0 mm)
Camber Front −0815’ −0825’ −0830’ −0810’ −0805’ −0820’
Rear −1825’ −1830’ −1840’ −1815’ −1810’ −1820’
Specifications 12-5
12
Black plate (344,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
12-6 Specifications
Fuses and circuits
& Fuse panel located behind the coin tray
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating Circuit
1 15A . Heater fan
2 15A . Heater fan
3 15A . Power door lock
. Remote keyless entry
4 20A . Power outlet (front)
. Remote controlled rear
view mirrors
5 10A . Tail light
. Parking light
6 15A . SRS airbag
7 15A . Fog light
8 20A . ABS solenoid
9 15A . Radio
10 Empty
11 15A . Engine ignition system
. SRS airbag
. AT control system
12 10A . Illumination brightness
control
Black plate (345,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating Circuit
13 10A . Combination meter
. SRS lamp
14 10A . Rear window wiper and
washer
15 30A . Windshield wiper and
washer
16 20A . Brake light
17 15A . Air conditioner
18 15A . Backup light
. Cruise control
19 20A . Mirror heater
20 Empty
21 15A . Ignition coil (Non-turbo
models only)
22 Empty
23 20A . Accessory power outlet
(cargo)
. Seat heater
Specifications 12-7
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (346,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
12-8 Specifications
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
A) FWD socket (AT models except Turbo)
B) Main fuse
C) Engine sensor (Non-turbo models)
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating Circuit
1 20A . Radiator cooling fan
(Main)
2 20A . Radiator cooling fan
(Sub)
3 30A . ABS motor
4 20A . Rear window defogger
5 15A . Hazard warning flasher
. Horn
6 15A . Turn signal lights
7 10A . Automatic transmission
control unit
8 10A . Alternator
9 15A . Headlight (right side)
10 15A . Headlight (left side)
11 20A . Lighting switch
12 20A . Clock
. Interior light
13 10A . Secondary air combination valve (Turbo models
only)
Black plate (347,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Bulb chart
Description Wattage Bulb type
Headlight
WRX-STI version
Low beam 12V-35W D2S
High beam 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)
Except WRX-STI version
Low beam 12V-55W H7
High beam 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)
Front fog light 12V-55W H3
Front turn signal light 12V-21W (Amber) –
Parking light 12V-5W 168
Front side marker light 12V-5W 168
Rear combination light
Brake/tail light 12V-21/5W 7443
Turn signal light 12V-21W (Amber) –
Backup light 12V-21W 7440
High mount stop light
Sedan (in compartment) 12V-21W –
Sedan (in rear spoiler) 12V-1.2W –
Wagon 12V-13W 912
License plate light 12V-5W 168
Trunk room light 12V-5W –
Cargo area light 12V-5W –
Specifications 12-9
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (348,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
12-10 Specifications
Description Wattage Bulb type
Dome light 12V-8W –
Map light 12V-8W –
Black plate (349,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Vehicle identification 1) Vehicle identification number
2) Emission control label
3) Tire inflation pressure label
4) Certification plate
5) Bar code label (U.S. only)
6) Vehicle identification number plate
7) Model number plate
8) Radio noise label (Canada only)
9) Fuel label
10) HID headlight mercury caution label
(U.S. only)
Specifications 12-11
12
Black plate (25,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2
Tire information.................................................. 13-2
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-5
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-6
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-7
Vehicle load limit – how to determine.................. 13-8
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load
capacities ...................................................... 13-10
Adverse safety consequences of overloading on
handling and stopping and on tires ................ 13-11
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-11
Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-12
Treadwear ....................................................... 13-12
Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-12
Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-12
Reporting safety defects (USA) ...................... 13-13
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Black plate (352,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A.
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part 575”.
Tire information
& Tire labeling
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire
manufacturers. These markings can
provide you with useful information on
the tire.
! Tire size
Your vehicle comes equipped with PMetric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in selecting the proper tire for your vehicles. Here is a brief review of the tire
sizing system with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
! P Metric
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters. To
convert millimeters into inches, divide
by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Section
Height divided by Section Width)
helps provide more dimensional information about the tire size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as passenger
cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height 7
section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating Descriptions
The load and speed rating descriptions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Second,
the letter designation indicates the
tire’s speed rating.
Black plate (353,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum load a
tire can carry at the speed indicated
by its speed symbol, at maximum
inflation pressure.
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580
kg).
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a
load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tire’s capability to
travel at established and predetermined speeds.
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated at
the tire’s rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if the
tires are worn out, damaged,
repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered from their original condition. If tires are repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered, they may not be
suitable for original equipment tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. The TIN is composed of four
groups. Here is a brief review of the
TIN with a breakdown of its individual
elements.
(1) Manufacturer ’s Identification
Mark
(2) Tire Size
(3) Tire Type Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first
full week of the calendar year; the
second two figures represent the
year. For example, 0101 means the
1st week of 2001.
! Other markings
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
! Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure
to which this tire may be inflated. For
example, “300 kPa (44 PSI) MAX.
PRESS”
! Maximum load rating
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg
(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) MAX.
PRESS.”
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (354,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated tire
on any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be loaded up to
the tire’s rated load.
! Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDEWALL
2 POLYESTER”
! Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG)
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
quality grading standards” in this
chapter.
Black plate (355,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
& Recommended tire inflation pressure
! Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires is as follows,
Tire size P205/55R16 89V 215/45R17 91W 225/45R17 90W
Wheel size 16 6 61/2 JJ 17 6 7 JJ 17 6 8 JJ
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
Rear 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2)
Temporary
spare tire
Size T135/70 D16 T135/70 D17
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (356,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
! Vehicle placard
The vehicle placard is affixed to the
driver’s side B-pillar.
Example:
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire inflation pressure on each tire at maximum loaded vehicle weight, seating
capacity and loading information.
! Adverse safety consequences
of under-inflation
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to rapidly
become hot. A sharp increase in
temperature could cause tread separation, and failure of the tire(s).
Possible resulting loss of vehicle
control could lead to an accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper inflation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are cold.
Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the specific values.
Driving even a short distance warms
up the tires and increases the tire
pressures. Also, the tire pressures are
affected by the outside temperature. It
is best to check tire pressure outdoors
before driving the vehicle. When a tire
becomes warm, the air inside it
expands, causing the tire pressure to
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
release air from a warm tire to reduce
its pressure.
& Glossary of tire terminology
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure
to which a tire may be inflated.
. Recommended inflation pressure
The cold inflation pressure recommended by a vehicle manufacturer.
. Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same molding
on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall of
Black plate (357,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
an asymmetrical tire that has a
particular side that must always
face outward when mounting on a
vehicle.
. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may be
replaced) of floor mats, leather seats
and cross bars to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed
or not).
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant and air conditioning.
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory
weight, vehicle capacity weight and
production options weight.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants (3 occupants).
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle,
2 in front, 1 in rear seat.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standards items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The total weight of cargo, luggage
and occupants that can be added to
the vehicle.
. Vehicle maximum load on a tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum loaded
vehicle weight and dividing by two.
. Vehicle normal load on a tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by two.
& Tire care – maintenance and
safety practices
. Check on a daily basis that the tires
are free from serious damage, nails,
and stones. At the same time, check
the tires for abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly and
replace the tires before their tread
wear indicators become visible. When
a tire’s tread wear indicator becomes
visible, the tire is worn beyond the
acceptable limit and must be replaced
immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at even low speeds in wet
weather can cause the vehicle to
hydroplane. Possible resulting loss
of vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the
front and rear tires on the right-hand
side of the vehicle and similarly
switching the front and rear tires on
the left-hand side of the vehicle.
(Each tire must be kept on its original
side of the vehicle.) Replace any
damaged or unevenly worn tires at
the time of rotation. After tire rotation,
adjust the tire pressures and make
sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened. A tightening torque specifiConsumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (358,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
cation and a tightening sequence
specification for the wheel nuts can
be found “Flat tires” section in chapter
9.
& Vehicle load limit – how to
determine
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s side
B-pillar. Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
The vehicle placard also shows seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all passengers and their belongings, any cargo,
any optional equipment such as a
trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
Therefore cargo capacity can be
calculated by the following method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight of
optional equipment + tongue load of a
trailer (if applicable))
For towing capacity information and
weight limits, refer to “Trailer towing”
section in chapter 8.
! Calculating total and load capacities varying seating configurations
Calculate the available load capacity
as shown in the following examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle
is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is indicated
on the vehicle placard with the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
900 lbs or 408 kg”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300 kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity by subtracting the total weight
from the vehicle capacity weight of
900 lbs (408 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can be
carried.
Black plate (359,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing 176
lbs (80 kg) now enters the same
vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to two), the calculations are as
follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds the
capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 kg), so
the cargo weight must be reduced by
92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle
is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is indicated
on the vehicle placard with the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
408 kg or 900 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170 kg).
In addition, the vehicle is fitted with a
trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs (10 kg), to
which is attached a trailer weighing
1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of the trailer
weight is applied to the trailer tongue
(i.e. Tongue load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (360,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can be
carried.
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing 143
lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 40 lbs
(18 kg) now enter the same vehicle
(bringing the number of occupants to
three), and a child restraint system
weighing 11 lbs (5 kg) is installed in
the vehicle for the child to use, the
calculations are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds the
capacity weight by 32 lbs (15 kg), so
the cargo weight must be reduced by
32 lbs (15 kg) or more.
& Determining compatibility of
tire and vehicle load capacities
The sum of four tires’ maximum load
ratings must exceed the maximum
loaded vehicle weight (“GVWR”). In
addition, sum of the maximum load
ratings of two front tires and of two
rear tires must exceed each axle’s
maximum loaded capacity (“GAWR”).
Original equipment tires are designed
to fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle weight
is referred to Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). And each axle’s
maximum loaded capacity is referred
to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
The GVWR and each axle’s GAWR
are shown on the vehicle certification
label affixed to the driver’s door.
The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehicle’s
suspension, axles and other parts of
Black plate (361,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
the body.
Therefore, this means that the vehicle
cannot necessarily be loaded up to
the tire’s maximum load rating on the
tire sidewall.
& Adverse safety consequences of overloading on
handling and stopping and
on tires
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, vehicle
and tire as shown in the following.
This could lead to an accident and
possibly result in severe personal
injury.
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted loads
could increase the risk of rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other body parts could break or
experience accelerated wear that will
shorten vehicle life.
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs
(635 kg) and there will be five- 150 lbs
(68 kg) passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11
13
Black plate (362,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Uniform tire quality grading
standards
This information indicates the relative
performance of passenger car tires in
the area of treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. This is to aid
the consumer in making an informed
choice in the purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. However, they do not apply to
deep tread, winter type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 12 inches or less, or to some limited
production tires.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
& Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half (1-1/2) times
as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and
climate.
& Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
& Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by
Black plate (363,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
Reporting safety defects
(USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Subaru of
America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of
America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13
13
Black plate (27,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
Index
14
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 20
14-2 Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-21
Warning light ................................................. 3-17, 7-22
Accessories....................................................... 5-2, 11-44
Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-6
Active head restraint..................................................... 1-4
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-15
Air conditioner ............................................................. 4-7
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-12
Air flow selection.......................................................... 4-2
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-13
All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles).................... 3-19
Aluminum wheels...................................................... 11-35
Antenna system........................................................... 5-2
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-21
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-14
Armrest....................................................................... 1-7
Ashtray ....................................................................... 6-8
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light ............................... 3-17
Audio set .................................................................... 5-3
Auto-dimming mirror/compass...................................... 3-32
Automatic climate control system ................................... 4-8
Automatic transmission ............................................... 7-15
Capacities ............................................................. 12-4
Fluid.................................................................... 11-20
Selector lever ........................................................ 7-16
Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP)................. 3-17
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-11
B
Battery .................................................................... 11-41
Jump starting .......................................................... 9-8
Replacement (Remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-7
Brake
Booster ............................................................... 11-27
Fluid ................................................................... 11-25
Pad and lining...................................................... 11-29
Parking ....................................................... 7-24, 11-30
Pedal .................................................................. 11-27
System.................................................................. 7-21
Brake pedal
Free play............................................................. 11-27
Reserve distance.................................................. 11-28
Brake system............................................................. 7-21
Warning light.......................................................... 3-18
Braking ..................................................................... 7-20
Tips ...................................................................... 7-20
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings................... 11-29
Bulb
Chart .................................................................... 12-9
Replacing ............................................................ 11-45
C
Capacities ................................................................. 12-4
Cargo area
Bars...................................................................... 6-12
Cover.................................................................... 6-10
Light ...................................................................... 6-2
Tie-down hooks...................................................... 6-11
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 20
Center
Console .................................................................. 6-4
Ventilators ............................................................... 4-3
Center and side ventilators............................................ 4-3
Changing
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-4
Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-9
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-16
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
lamp...................................................................... 3-16
Checking
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-27
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-28
Clutch function...................................................... 11-28
Clutch pedal free play............................................ 11-28
Engine oil level ...................................................... 11-8
Fluid level ............................... 11-20, 11-24, 11-25, 11-26
Gear oil level ........................................................ 11-22
Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-22
Installation with A/ELR seatbelt................................ 1-25
Lower and tether anchorages .................................. 1-29
Child safety .................................................................... 5
Locks ................................................................... 2-18
Chime
Key ........................................................................ 3-5
Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-11, 3-14
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels................................................... 10-3
Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Ventilation grille ..................................................... 4-11
Climate control system
Automatic ............................................................... 4-8
Manual................................................................... 4-3
Clock ........................................................................ 3-22
Clutch
Fluid ................................................................... 11-26
Pedal .................................................................. 11-28
Coat hook................................................................... 6-9
Coin tray .................................................................... 6-4
Cooling system ........................................................ 11-12
Corrosion protection............................................ 8-10, 10-4
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-26
Set indicator light.................................................... 3-20
Cruise control indicator light ......................................... 3-20
Cup holder ................................................................. 6-5
Front passenger’s.................................................... 6-5
Rear passenger’s .................................................... 6-6
D
Daytime running light system ....................................... 3-23
Differential gear oil
Front................................................................... 11-21
Rear ................................................................... 11-22
Dimensions................................................................ 12-2
Disarming the system ................................................. 2-15
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-21
Dome light .................................................................. 6-2
Door
Locks..................................................................... 2-4
Open warning light.................................................. 3-19
Drive belts ............................................................... 11-18
Index 14-3
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 20
14-4 Index
Driver’s Control Center Differential ............................... 7-12
Auto indicator light ................................................. 3-20
Indicator light......................................................... 3-21
Driving
All-Wheel Drive vehicle ........................................... 3-19
Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7
Drinking ..................................................................... 6
Drugs ........................................................................ 6
Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-4
Pets .......................................................................... 7
Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 8-9
Tips........................................................ 7-10, 7-12, 8-5
Tired or sleepy............................................................ 7
E
Electrical system........................................................ 12-3
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system........................................................... 3-18, 7-23
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-11
Engine
Compartment overview ........................................... 11-6
Coolant................................................................ 11-13
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ............................ 6, 8-2
Hood .................................................................... 11-4
Oil........................................................................ 11-8
Overheating .......................................................... 9-11
Starting................................................................... 7-7
Stopping ................................................................. 7-8
Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2
F
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-4
Floor mat.................................................................... 6-9
Fluid level
Automatic transmission ......................................... 11-20
Brake.................................................................. 11-25
Clutch ................................................................. 11-26
Power steering ..................................................... 11-24
Front
Differential gear oil................................................ 11-21
Fog light .............................................................. 11-49
Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-19
Seats ..................................................................... 1-2
Turn signal light.................................................... 11-49
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-2
Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2
Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-4
Gauge............................................................ 3-8, 3-12
Requirements ......................................................... 7-2
Fuses ..................................................................... 11-42
Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-6
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-14
Glove box................................................................... 6-4
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-14
H
Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-6, 9-2
Head restraint adjustment............................................. 1-4
Rear ...................................................................... 1-7
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 20
Headlight
Beam leveler ......................................................... 3-25
Flasher ................................................................. 3-23
Indicator light......................................................... 3-21
Headlights........................................................ 3-22, 11-46
Heater operation .......................................................... 4-5
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-20
High mount stop light................................................. 11-52
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-23
Horn......................................................................... 3-35
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-12
I
Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-3
Light....................................................................... 3-5
Illuminated entry .......................................................... 2-8
Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-25
Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-3
Indicator light........................................................... 2-4
Indicator light
Cruise control ........................................................ 3-20
Cruise control set................................................... 3-20
Headlight .............................................................. 3-21
High beam ............................................................ 3-20
REV ..................................................................... 3-21
Selector lever position ............................................ 3-20
Turn signal ............................................................ 3-20
Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-32
Intercooler water spray .............................................. 11-36
Switch .................................................................. 3-31
Warning light ......................................................... 3-19
Interior light................................................................. 6-2
Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-21
J
Jack and jack handle .................................................. 9-16
Jump starting .............................................................. 9-8
K
Key
Interlock release...................................................... 3-5
Keyless entry system ............................................... 2-7
Number .................................................................. 2-2
Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-5
Replacement........................................................... 2-4
Keys .......................................................................... 2-2
L
Leather seat materials................................................. 10-5
Light
Cargo area ............................................................. 6-2
Control switch ........................................................ 3-22
Dome..................................................................... 6-2
Map ....................................................................... 6-2
Limited slip differential (LSD)........................................ 7-20
Loading your vehicle ................................................... 8-12
Low fuel warning light .......................................... 3-8, 3-12
LSD (Limited slip differential)........................................ 7-20
Index 14-5
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 20
14-6 Index
M
Main fuse................................................................. 11-44
Maintenance
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Schedule .............................................................. 11-3
Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-18
Tools .................................................................... 9-16
Manual
Climate control system ............................................. 4-3
Transmission oil .................................................... 11-19
Transmission-5 speeds ........................................... 7-11
Transmission-6 speeds ............................................. 7-9
Map light..................................................................... 6-2
Maximum load limits................................................... 8-20
Meters and gauges .............................................. 3-6, 3-11
Mirrors...................................................................... 3-32
Moonroof .................................................................. 2-24
N
New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2
O
Odometer/Tripmeter ............................................. 3-7, 3-11
Off road driving............................................................ 8-6
Oil filter..................................................................... 11-9
Oil level
Engine.................................................................. 11-8
Front differential gear (AT vehicles) ......................... 11-21
Manual transmission.............................................. 11-19
Rear differential .................................................... 11-22
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-16
Outside mirrors .......................................................... 3-33
Outside temperature indicator ............................... 3-9, 3-13
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-11
P
Parking
Brake.................................................................... 7-24
Brake stroke ........................................................ 11-30
Light switch ........................................................... 3-25
Tips ...................................................................... 7-25
Parking your vehicle ................................................... 7-24
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Power
Door locking switch.................................................. 2-6
Steering ................................................................ 7-20
Steering fluid........................................................ 11-24
Windows ............................................................... 2-18
Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-22, 1-57
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-6
Printed antenna........................................................... 5-2
R
Rear
Combination lights ................................................ 11-49
Gate ............................................................. 2-23, 9-14
Seats ..................................................................... 1-6
Viscous limited slip differential.................................. 7-20
Rear differential
Gear oil ............................................................... 11-22
Oil temperature warning light ................................... 3-17
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 20
Rear seat
Folding down........................................................... 1-8
Rear window
Defogger button ..................................................... 3-29
Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 3-28
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-39
Recommended
Automatic transmission fluid ................................... 11-21
Brake fluid............................................................ 11-26
Clutch fluid........................................................... 11-27
OIL grade and
viscosity...................... 11-11, 11-12, 11-20, 11-22, 11-23
Power steering fluid............................................... 11-25
Spark plugs.......................................................... 11-18
Remote keyless entry system ........................................ 2-7
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-29
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-38
Replacing
Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-15
Battery (remote keyless entry system) ........................ 2-7
Lost transmitters (keyless entry system).................... 2-10
Replacing bulbs ........................................................ 11-45
Cargo area light .................................................... 11-51
Clearance light ..................................................... 11-49
Dome light ........................................................... 11-51
Front fog light ....................................................... 11-49
Front turn signal light............................................. 11-49
Headlight ............................................................. 11-46
High mount stop light............................................. 11-52
License plate light ................................................. 11-51
Map light ............................................................. 11-51
Rear combination light .......................................... 11-49
Trunk light ........................................................... 11-52
REV indicator light and buzzer ...................................... 3-9
Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-12
Roof rail and crossbar................................................. 8-14
S
Safety
Precautions when driving............................................. 4
Symbol...................................................................... 2
Warnings ................................................................... 2
Seat
Fabric ................................................................... 10-5
Heater.................................................................... 1-5
Seatbelt......................................................................... 4
Extender ............................................................... 1-18
Maintenance .......................................................... 1-18
Pretensioners......................................................... 1-19
Safety tips .............................................................. 1-9
Warning light and chime .................................. 1-11, 3-14
Seatbelts .................................................................... 1-9
Security ID plate.......................................................... 2-3
Selector lever............................................................. 7-16
Position indicator .................................................... 3-20
Shift lock release........................................................ 7-19
Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-17
Snow tires ................................................................. 8-10
Snowy and icy roads ................................................... 8-9
Sounding a panic alarm ............................................... 2-8
Spark plugs ............................................................. 11-17
Index 14-7
Black plate (8,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 20
14-8 Index
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2
Speedometer....................................................... 3-7, 3-11
SRS
Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-39
Side airbag ........................................................... 1-50
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-35
SRS airbag system
Monitors................................................................ 1-55
Servicing............................................................... 1-56
Warning light ......................................................... 3-14
Starting the engine....................................................... 7-7
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-5
Steering wheel
Power................................................................... 7-20
Tilt ....................................................................... 3-35
STI front lip spoiler ..................................................... 8-28
Stopping the engine ..................................................... 7-8
Storage compartment ................................................... 6-4
Sun shade ................................................................ 2-26
Sun visors................................................................... 6-3
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-35
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5
T
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7, 3-12
Temperature gauge .............................................. 3-8, 3-13
Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP)..................... 3-17
Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2
Tie-down hooks ......................................................... 9-12
Tilt steering wheel ...................................................... 3-35
Tire
Chains .................................................................. 8-11
Inspection............................................................ 11-30
Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-31
Replacement........................................................ 11-34
Rotation .............................................................. 11-34
Tires ......................................................................... 12-5
Types.................................................................. 11-30
Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-30
Top tether anchorages ................................................ 1-32
Towing ...................................................................... 9-11
All wheels on the ground ......................................... 9-14
Flat-bed truck......................................................... 9-13
Tie-down hooks...................................................... 9-12
Weight .................................................................. 8-20
Trailer
Hitch ..................................................................... 8-17
Hitches.................................................................. 8-23
Towing .................................................................. 8-20
Towing tips ............................................................ 8-25
Trunk lid .................................................................... 2-20
Release handle ...................................................... 2-21
Trunk light ............................................................... 11-52
Turn signal
Indicator lights........................................................ 3-20
Lever .................................................................... 3-24
U
Under-floor storage compartment.................................. 6-12
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 20
V
Valet mode................................................................ 2-16
Vanity mirror ................................................................ 6-3
Vehicle
Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-13
Identification ......................................................... 12-11
Symbols .................................................................... 3
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2
W
Warning and indicator lights ........................................ 3-14
Warning light
ABS ..................................................................... 3-17
All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-19
Anti-lock Brake System........................................... 3-17
AT OIL TEMPerature .............................................. 3-17
Brake system ........................................................ 3-18
Charge ................................................................. 3-16
CHECK ENGINE ................................................... 3-16
Door open............................................................. 3-19
Driver’s Control Center Differential ........................... 7-12
Intercooler water spray ........................................... 3-19
Low fuel.......................................................... 3-8, 3-12
Oil pressure .......................................................... 3-16
Rear differential oil temperature ............................... 3-17
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-14
SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-14
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-20
Washing ................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3
Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-33
Wheel
Alignment .............................................................. 12-5
Balance............................................................... 11-33
Replacement........................................................ 11-35
Windows ................................................................... 2-18
Windshield
Washer fluid......................................................... 11-36
Wiper and washer switches ..................................... 3-27
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-38
Wiper deicer .......................................................... 3-30
Winter driving.............................................................. 8-8
Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-26
Index 14-9
Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
10
9
876
5
4
3
11
12
13
000134
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A1920BE-B" EDITED: 2006/ 9/ 19
GAS STATION REFERENCE
& Fuel:
! 2.5-liter non-turbo models
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or
higher.
! WRX
Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI
or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
91 AKI is not available, regular unleaded gasoline with octane
rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For
optimum engine performance and driveability, it is required that
you use premium grade unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 91 AKI or higher.
! WRX-STI
Use super-premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
93 AKI or higher. If super-premium unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 93 AKI is not available, premium unleaded
gasoline with octane rating of 91 AKI or higher may be
temporarily used. For optimum engine performance and
driveability, it is required that you use super-premium grade
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI or higher.
& Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” section in this manual.
& Fuel capacity
15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
& Engine oil:
Use only API classification SM with the words “ENERGY
CONSERVING” and the ILSAC certification mark (starburst
mark) displayed on the container.
& Engine oil capacity:
4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
& Cold tire pressure:
Tire size P205/55R16 89V 215/45R17 91W 225/45R17 90W
Wheel size 16 6 61/2 JJ 17 6 7 JJ 17 6 8 JJ
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
Rear 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2)
Temporary
spare tire
Size T135/70 D16 T135/70 D17
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2)

PDF Document reader online

This website is focused on providing document in readable format, online without need to install any type of software on your computer. If you are using thin client, or are not allowed to install document reader of particular type, this application may come in hand for you. Simply upload your document, and Docureader.top will transform it into readable format in a few seconds. Why choose Docureader.top?

  1. Unlimited sharing - you can upload document of any size. If we are able to convert it into readable format, you have it here - saved for later or immediate reading
  2. Cross-platform - no compromised when reading your document. We support most of modern browers without the need of installing any of external plugins. If your device can oper a browser - then you can read any document on it
  3. Simple uploading - no need to register. Just enter your email, title of document and select the file, we do the rest. Once the document is ready for you, you will receive automatic email from us.

Previous 10

Next 10